MC100 en

Filename: EAAM034510EN.
docx
Rev. 10 Date: 11/04/2017
ID Document: EAAM0345
Product: MC100
Revision Date Page Notes
00 08/06/2010 108 First release of this document, valid from software 1.01 of MC100
01 01/07/2010 14-15, 18, 39, 52, 87 – 90
02 30/10/2010 111 Valid from software 1.01 of MC100.

3.1, 3.3, 7.1, 4.4.1, 4.5.1, 9.11
Changes in the structure document
03 17/07/2013 Changes in the structure document
05 08/01/2015 167 Complete revision of the manual. Update to version 1.25 of

controller
06 28/10/2015 162 Update to version 1.28 of controller

5.6, 10.9.4, 6.3.3.1, 11.727...11.742, 7.4, 7.5.1, 7.6

7.5, 10.7.1,10.11.2, 11.023, 11.024, 11.101…11.118,
11.727…11.742, 12.1
10.13.5, 11.207

10.7.1, 10.11.5.1, 11.281

10.3.2.4, 10.9.3, 10.9.4
ii MC100 Technical Manual

INDEX
1. Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 References ........................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Information on safety ............................................................................................ 1
1.3 Information on recycling........................................................................................ 1
1.4 Forward ................................................................................................................ 2
1.5 Requirements ....................................................................................................... 2
1.6 Notes on the parameters configuration of the device ........................................... 2
1.7 Definitions ............................................................................................................. 2
1.7.1 Anomalies....................................................................................................... 2
1.7.2 Acronyms ....................................................................................................... 3
1.8 Symbols ................................................................................................................ 4
1.9 Firmware revisions................................................................................................ 4
1.10 Hardware options ........................................................................................... 4
2. Views of the device .................................................................................................. 5
3. Installation ................................................................................................................ 7
3.1 Mounting ............................................................................................................... 7
4. Technical features ................................................................................................... 9
5. Connections ........................................................................................................... 12
5.1 JC Functional Earth ............................................................................................ 12
5.2 JB Device Supply ............................................................................................... 12
5.3 Connection to the mains ..................................................................................... 13
5.4 Connection to the JE genset busbar ................................................................... 14
5.4.1 Aron insertion of the voltage transformers .................................................... 15
5.5 Current transformers connection (JD)................................................................. 16
5.6 Connection of the auxiliary current transformer. ................................................. 17
5.7 Generic digital inputs .......................................................................................... 18
5.7.1 JN Connector ............................................................................................... 18
5.7.2 JV connector ................................................................................................ 18
5.7.3 JU connector ................................................................................................ 19
5.8 Generic digital outputs ........................................................................................ 19
5.8.1 JG connector ................................................................................................ 20
5.8.2 JI connector .................................................................................................. 20
5.8.3 JT connector................................................................................................. 20
5.8.4 JS connector ................................................................................................ 21
5.8.5 JR Connector ............................................................................................... 21
5.8.6 JH Connector ............................................................................................... 21
5.9 Generic analogue inputs ..................................................................................... 22
5.9.1 5.9.1 Use of the analogue inputs with potentiometers .................................. 22
5.9.2 JW connector ............................................................................................... 22
5.9.3 JM connector ................................................................................................ 22
5.10 Serial communication ports .......................................................................... 22
5.10.1 JA - Main serial communication port ....................................................... 22
5.10.2 JZ - Additional serial communication port ............................................... 23
5.11 PMCB BUS................................................................................................... 23
5.12 Other connectors .......................................................................................... 23
6. Front panel ............................................................................................................. 24
MC100 Technical Manual iii

6.1 Pushbuttons........................................................................................................ 24
6.2 LEDs ................................................................................................................... 26
6.3 Multifunction display ........................................................................................... 28
6.3.1 Lighting ......................................................................................................... 28
6.3.2 Contrast adjustment ..................................................................................... 28
6.3.3 Mode navigation ........................................................................................... 29
6.3.4 Display areas................................................................................................ 29
6.3.1 (P.XX) Programming .................................................................................... 30
6.3.2 (S.XX) Status................................................................................................ 30
6.3.2.1 S.01 STATUS ....................................................................................... 30
6.3.2.2 S.02 ANOMALIES ................................................................................ 30
6.3.2.3 S.03 PLANT ......................................................................................... 31
6.3.2.4 S.04 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ........................................................ 31
6.3.2.5 S.05 CAN-BUS ..................................................................................... 32
6.3.2.6 S.06 CONTROLLER............................................................................. 32
6.3.2.7 S.07 DIGITAL INPUTS ......................................................................... 32
6.3.2.8 S.08 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ..................................................................... 33
6.3.2.9 S.09 ANALOGUE I/O ........................................................................... 33
6.3.3 (M.XX) Electrical measurements .................................................................. 33
6.3.3.1 M.01 SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 33
6.3.3.2 M.02 MAINS ......................................................................................... 34
6.3.3.3 M.03 GENERATORS ........................................................................... 34
6.3.3.4 M.04 CURRENTS ................................................................................ 34
6.3.3.5 M.05 POWERS 1 ................................................................................. 34
6.3.3.6 M.06 POWERS 2 ................................................................................. 35
6.3.3.7 M.07 ENERGY 1 .................................................................................. 35
6.3.3.8 M.08 ENERGY 2 .................................................................................. 35
6.3.4 (B.XX) Parallel management ........................................................................ 35
6.3.4.1 B.01 MAINS PARALLEL....................................................................... 35
6.3.4.2 B.02 SYNCHRONIZATION .................................................................. 36
6.3.4.3 B.03 TOTALS PMCB ............................................................................ 37
6.3.4.4 B.04 CONTROLLERS .......................................................................... 37
6.3.4.5 B.05 GENERATORS 1 ......................................................................... 38
6.3.4.6 B.06 GENERATORS 2 ......................................................................... 38
6.3.4.7 B.07 GENERATORS 3 ......................................................................... 38
6.3.4.8 B.08 GENERATORS 4 ......................................................................... 38
6.3.4.9 B.09 LOAD FUNCTION ........................................................................ 38
6.3.4.10 B.10 LOAD FUNCTION 2 ................................................................... 39
6.3.4.11 B.11 LOAD SHEDDING ..................................................................... 39
6.3.5 Event logs..................................................................................................... 39
7. Programming ......................................................................................................... 41
7.1 General structure ................................................................................................ 41
7.1.1 Organization ................................................................................................. 41
7.1.2 Protection ..................................................................................................... 41
7.1.3 SICES password .......................................................................................... 43
7.2 Operating procedure ........................................................................................... 43
7.2.1 Enter the programming mode ....................................................................... 44
7.2.2 Menu selection ............................................................................................. 44
7.2.3 Parameters selection .................................................................................... 44
7.2.4 Parameters modification ............................................................................... 44
7.2.5 Set up limits .................................................................................................. 46
iv MC100 Technical Manual

7.2.6 Exit from programming ................................................................................. 46
7.2.7 Loading default values ................................................................................. 46
7.3 Additional notes .................................................................................................. 46
7.4 AND/OR Logics .................................................................................................. 47
7.5 Digital input configuration ................................................................................... 50
7.5.1 Virtual digital inputs ...................................................................................... 56
7.6 Digital output configuration ................................................................................. 57
7.7 Analogue input configuration .............................................................................. 59
8. Event logs .............................................................................................................. 62
8.1 Entering the archives .......................................................................................... 64
8.2 Exit from archives visualization ........................................................................... 64
8.3 Archive selection ................................................................................................ 64
8.4 Events page........................................................................................................ 65
8.5 Pages for fast/slow analogue records ................................................................. 65
8.6 Peak pages......................................................................................................... 66
9. Special procedures................................................................................................ 67
9.1 Special procedure activation ............................................................................... 67
9.2 “LANGUAGE”: language selection ..................................................................... 68
10. Working sequences ............................................................................................... 69
10.1 Controllers “managed by MC100” ................................................................ 69
10.2 Operating mode ............................................................................................ 69
10.2.1 Events ..................................................................................................... 72
10.2.2 Signals .................................................................................................... 72
10.3 Mains ............................................................................................................ 73
10.3.1 Automatic Mains Failure.......................................................................... 73
10.3.1.1 External sensor .................................................................................. 73
10.3.1.2 Internal sensors .................................................................................. 74
10.3.1.2.1 Frequency check ....................................................................... 74
10.3.1.2.2 Voltages check .......................................................................... 74
10.3.1.2.3 Asymmetry check ...................................................................... 75
10.3.1.2.4 Cycling sense ............................................................................ 75
10.3.1.2.5 Internal sensor status ................................................................ 75
10.3.1.3 Mains general status .......................................................................... 76
10.3.1.4 Events ................................................................................................ 76
10.3.1.5 Signals................................................................................................ 76
10.3.2 “Loss of mains” protection ....................................................................... 76
10.3.2.1 External sensor .................................................................................. 77
10.3.2.2 Internal sensor .................................................................................... 77
10.3.2.2.1 Detection of mains failure by voltage ........................................ 77
10.3.2.2.2 Detection of mains failure by frequency .................................... 77
10.3.2.3 Timings ............................................................................................... 79
10.3.2.4 Actions related to “loss of mains” ....................................................... 80
10.3.2.5 Events ................................................................................................ 81
10.3.2.6 Signals................................................................................................ 81
10.4 Gensets supplying ........................................................................................ 82
10.5 Gensets bus voltage detection ..................................................................... 82
10.5.1 External sensor ....................................................................................... 82
10.5.2 Internal sensor ........................................................................................ 82
10.5.3 Signals .................................................................................................... 82
MC100 Technical Manual v

10.6 Load bus voltage detection........................................................................... 83
10.6.1 Signals .................................................................................................... 83
10.7 Synchronization ............................................................................................ 83
10.7.1 Synchro-check ........................................................................................ 83
10.7.1.1 Signals................................................................................................ 86
10.7.2 Voltages, frequency and phase regulations ............................................ 86
10.7.2.1 Using external synchronizer ............................................................... 86
10.7.2.2 Using internal synchronizer ................................................................ 88
10.7.2.2.1 PI regulator................................................................................ 88
10.7.3 Digital inputs for synchronization ............................................................ 89
10.7.4 Digital outputs for synchronization .......................................................... 89
10.7.5 Automatic synchronization ...................................................................... 90
10.7.6 Manual synchronisation .......................................................................... 90
10.7.7 MCB synchronization failure ................................................................... 92
10.8 Measuring active power on mains ................................................................ 92
10.8.1 Method 1 ................................................................................................. 92
10.8.2 Method 2 ................................................................................................. 92
10.8.3 Method 3 ................................................................................................. 93
10.9 Active power management ........................................................................... 93
10.9.1 BASE LOAD............................................................................................ 95
10.9.2 IMPORT/EXPORT .................................................................................. 95
10.9.3 Transfer to generators............................................................................. 96
10.9.4 Load and unload ramps .......................................................................... 97
10.10 Reactive power management ....................................................................... 98
10.11 Circuit breakers .......................................................................................... 100
10.11.1 Configuration......................................................................................... 100
10.11.2 Digital outputs for commands................................................................ 101
10.11.3 Minimum delays between commands ................................................... 103
10.11.4 Digital inputs for statuses ...................................................................... 103
10.11.5 Management logic ................................................................................. 104
10.11.5.1 MCB command logic ...................................................................... 104
10.11.5.2 MGCB command logic.................................................................... 105
10.11.5.3 OFF/RESET management logic ..................................................... 107
10.11.5.4 MAN management logic ................................................................. 107
10.11.5.5 Management logic in AUTO mode.................................................. 109
10.11.6 Events ................................................................................................... 111
10.12 Commands for gensets .............................................................................. 112
10.13 Plant types.................................................................................................. 113
10.13.1 Gensets automatic start inhibition ......................................................... 114
10.13.1.1 Inhibition from contact .................................................................... 114
10.13.1.2 Inhibition from clock ........................................................................ 114
10.13.1.3 Inhibition for mains failure ............................................................... 115
10.13.1.4 Inhibition for “GCB circuit breaker not open” .................................. 115
10.13.2 Inhibition for “power load” for MC100 ................................................... 115
10.13.2.1 Inhibition from contact .................................................................... 116
10.13.2.2 Control from serial ports ................................................................. 116
10.13.2.3 Mains failure ................................................................................... 116
10.13.2.4 Inhibition for “GCB circuit breaker not open” .................................. 116
10.13.2.5 Inhibition for “MCB synchronization failure” .................................... 116
10.13.2.6 Inhibition for MGCB supplied by gensets........................................ 116
10.13.2.7 Inhibition in “test” ............................................................................ 116
vi MC100 Technical Manual

10.13.2.8 Forcing of the GCB circuit breakers opening .................................. 117
10.13.2.9 Forcing of the “inhibition to power load”.......................................... 117
10.13.2.10 Forcing in MAN ............................................................................. 117
10.13.2.11 Forcing for “GCB circuit breaker not open” ................................... 118
10.13.2.12 Forcing for supply in “island mode”............................................... 118
10.13.2.13 Forcing for the closing of MGCB before GCB. .............................. 118
10.13.2.14 Forcing for the MCB closing ......................................................... 118
10.13.2.15 Forcing for MGCB closing ............................................................ 118
10.13.2.16 Forcing because the parallel with the mains is not possible. ........ 119
10.13.3 MPM (Multiple Prime Mover) ................................................................. 119
10.13.4 MSB (Multiple Stand By) ....................................................................... 121
10.13.5 MSB+MSTP (Multiple Stand By + Multiple Short Time Parallel) ........... 124
10.13.6 MPTM (Multiple Parallel To Mains) ....................................................... 128
10.13.7 MPTM+MSB (Multiple Parallel To Mains + Multiple Stand By) ............. 130
10.14 Load function .............................................................................................. 131
10.14.1 Starting/stopping generators to meet power requests ........................... 131
10.14.2 Selecting generators ............................................................................. 133
10.14.2.1 Manual “master” genset selection .................................................. 133
10.14.2.2 Automatic “master” generator selection at fixed time...................... 134
10.14.2.3 Automatic “master” generator selection every x hours ................... 134
10.14.3 Actions on “master” change .................................................................. 134
10.14.4 Events ................................................................................................... 134
10.15 Load shedding ............................................................................................ 134
10.15.1 Normally MC100 is able to connect or disconnect one group of loads at a
time. 135
10.15.2 Single load management ...................................................................... 136
10.15.3 Manual commands ................................................................................ 137
10.15.4 Notes about “load shedding” ................................................................. 137
10.15.5 Events ................................................................................................... 137
11. Anomalies ............................................................................................................ 138
11.1 Silence the horn. ........................................................................................ 139
11.2 Identify the anomaly ................................................................................... 139
11.3 Cancel the anomaly .................................................................................... 139
11.4 Signals........................................................................................................ 139
005 - At least one GCB is not opened ........................................................................ 140
007 – Manual STOP pressed in automatic mode ....................................................... 140
008 - Power required for supply not reached .............................................................. 140
013 - MCB not closed ................................................................................................. 141
014 - MGCB not closed .............................................................................................. 141
016 – Maximum current (#1) ...................................................................................... 141
017 – Maximum current (#2) ...................................................................................... 143
021 – Time-out for stopping generators...................................................................... 143
022 – Time-out for starting generators ....................................................................... 143
023 – MCB opening failure ......................................................................................... 144
024 – MGCB opening failure ...................................................................................... 144
037 – Low power supply voltage ................................................................................ 144
038 – High power supply voltage................................................................................ 145
048 – Emergency stop................................................................................................ 145
051 – High internal board temperature ....................................................................... 145
101 – From input # 1. ................................................................................................. 146
102 – From input # 2. ................................................................................................. 146
MC100 Technical Manual vii

103 – From input # 3. ................................................................................................. 146
104 – From input # 4. ................................................................................................. 146
105 – From input # 5. ................................................................................................. 146
106 – From input # 6. ................................................................................................. 146
107 – From input # 7. ................................................................................................. 146
108 – From input # 8. ................................................................................................. 146
109 – From input # 9. ................................................................................................. 146
110 – From input # 10. ............................................................................................... 146
111 – From input # 11. ............................................................................................... 146
112 – From input # 12. ............................................................................................... 146
113 – From input # 13. ............................................................................................... 146
114 – From input # 14. ............................................................................................... 146
115 – From input # 15. ............................................................................................... 146
116 – From input # 16. ............................................................................................... 146
117 – From input # 17. ............................................................................................... 146
118 – From input # 18. ............................................................................................... 146
200 – CAN-BUS PMCB faulty connection .................................................................. 147
201 – Duplicated address over the PMCB .................................................................. 147
202 – Wrong number of generators over the PMCB................................................... 147
207 – Maximum time in parallel to the grid. ................................................................ 147
271 – MGCB synchronization failure .......................................................................... 148
272 – MCB synchronization failure ............................................................................. 148
273 – Incoherent parameters ..................................................................................... 148
274 – Production line open ......................................................................................... 149
275 – Interface device not opened ............................................................................. 149
281 – Maximum power exported to the mains. ........................................................... 149
727 – From virtual digital input # 1.............................................................................. 150
736 – From virtual digital input # 10............................................................................ 150
12. Other functions .................................................................................................... 152
12.1 Loads protection from mains breaker damages ......................................... 152
12.2 Alternative configuration set ....................................................................... 152
12.3 EJP function ............................................................................................... 153
12.4 Counters ..................................................................................................... 154
12.5 Clock .......................................................................................................... 155
12.6 Thermometer .............................................................................................. 155
12.7 Fault signalling ........................................................................................... 155
12.8 Serial ports ................................................................................................. 156
viii MC100 Technical Manual

AIF.0000 ............................................................... 22; 60 DIF.0076 ............................................. 56; 146; 147; 150
AIF.0010 ............................................................... 60; 87 DIF.0077 ..................................... 56; 146; 147; 150; 152
AIF.0011 ............................................................... 60; 87 DIF.0078 ..................................... 56; 146; 147; 150; 151
AIF.0012 ............................................................... 60; 87 DIF.0082 ............................................................. 56; 149
AIF.0020 ............................................................... 60; 91 DOF.0000 ....................................................... 20; 21; 57
AIF.0021 ............................................................... 60; 91 DOF.0010 ........................................................... 57; 101
AIF.0030 ............................................................... 60; 95 DOF.0011 ........................................................... 58; 101
AIF.0031 ......................................................... 60; 98; 99 DOF.0012 ........................................................... 58; 101
AIF.0032 ............................................................... 61; 96 DOF.0013 ..................................................... 20; 58; 101
AIF.0040 ......................................................... 61; 92; 93 DOF.0014 ..................................................... 51; 58; 109
DIF.0000 ......................................................... 18; 19; 51 DOF.0015 ..................................................... 52; 58; 109
DIF.0010 ....................................... 18; 51; 103; 141; 144 DOF.0020 ................................................... 58; 101; 102
DIF.0011 ............................................................. 51; 107 DOF.0021 ........................................................... 58; 102
DIF.0012 ............................................................. 51; 107 DOF.0022 ........................................................... 58; 102
DIF.0013 ....................................................... 51; 89; 105 DOF.0023 ..................................................... 20; 58; 102
DIF.0014 ....................................................... 51; 58; 109 DOF.0024 ..................................................... 52; 58; 110
DIF.0015 ....................................................... 52; 58; 109 DOF.0025 ..................................................... 52; 58; 110
DIF.0020 ....................................... 18; 52; 103; 141; 144 DOF.0030 ............................................................. 58; 90
DIF.0021 ............................................................. 52; 108 DOF.0031 ............................................................. 58; 90
DIF.0022 ............................................................. 52; 108 DOF.0032 ........................................... 51; 52; 58; 86; 90
DIF.0023 ....................................................... 52; 89; 106 DOF.0033 ............................................................. 58; 76
DIF.0024 ....................................................... 52; 58; 110 DOF.0034 ....................................................... 58; 79; 81
DIF.0025 ....................................................... 52; 58; 110 DOF.0035 ............................................................. 59; 83
DIF.0030 ......................................................... 53; 59; 83 DOF.0036 ............................................................. 59; 83
DIF.0031 ............................................................... 53; 82 DOF.0037 ........................................................... 59; 112
DIF.0040 ................................................... 27; 53; 74; 77 DOF.0038 ........................................................... 59; 112
DIF.0041 ....................................................... 53; 56; 114 DOF.0040 ................................................... 59; 138; 140
DIF.0042 ....................................................... 53; 71; 153 DOF.0041 ........................................................... 59; 140
DIF.0043 ............................................................... 54; 71 DOF.0050 ........................................................... 59; 135
DIF.0044 ............................................. 54; 116; 153; 154 DOF.0051 ........................................................... 59; 135
DIF.0045 ............................................................... 54; 71 DOF.0052 ........................................................... 59; 135
DIF.0046 ............................................................... 54; 70 DOF.0053 ........................................................... 59; 135
DIF.0047 ............................................................... 54; 70 DOF.0060 ............................................... 57; 59; 72; 140
DIF.0048 ............................................................... 54; 70 DOF.0061 ........................................................... 59; 155
DIF.0050 ............................................................... 31; 54 DOF.0062 ............................................................. 28; 59
DIF.0051 ............................................................... 31; 54 DOF.0103 ............................................................. 47; 59
DIF.0052 ............................................................. 54; 153 EVT.1000 .................................................................... 62
DIF.0053 ............................................................. 54; 153 EVT.1001 .................................................................... 62
DIF.0054 ............................................................. 54; 153 EVT.1002 .................................................................... 62
DIF.0055 ............................................................. 54; 153 EVT.1003 .................................................................... 62
DIF.0056 ....................................................... 18; 54; 131 EVT.1004 .................................................................... 62
DIF.0057 ............................................................... 55; 95 EVT.1011 .............................................................. 62; 72
DIF.0058 ............................................................... 55; 96 EVT.1012 .............................................................. 62; 72
DIF.0060 ............................................................. 55; 135 EVT.1013 .............................................................. 62; 72
DIF.0061 ............................................................. 55; 137 EVT.1014 .............................................................. 62; 72
DIF.0062 ............................................................. 55; 137 EVT.1015 .............................................................. 62; 72
DIF.0063 ............................................................. 55; 111 EVT.1021 ............................................................ 62; 111
DIF.0064 ............................................................... 55; 95 EVT.1022 ............................................................ 62; 111
DIF.0065 ............................................................... 55; 82 EVT.1023 ............................................................ 62; 111
DIF.0070 ............................................................. 55; 139 EVT.1024 ............................................................ 62; 111
DIF.0071 ............................................................. 56; 139 EVT.1031 ............................................................ 62; 111
DIF.0072 ....................................................... 18; 56; 145 EVT.1032 ............................................................ 62; 112
DIF.0073 ..................................................... 56; 146; 150 EVT.1033 ............................................................ 63; 112
DIF.0074 ..................................................... 56; 146; 150 EVT.1034 ............................................................ 63; 112
DIF.0075 ..................................................... 56; 146; 150 EVT.1041 .............................................................. 63; 76
MC100 Technical Manual ix

EVT.1042 .............................................................. 63; 76 P.1604 ........................................................................ 57
EVT.1043 .............................................................. 63; 76 P.1640 ...................................................... 20; 21; 33; 57
EVT.1061 .............................................................. 63; 81 P.1841 ........................ 59; 60; 87; 91; 92; 93; 95; 96; 98
EVT.1062 .............................................................. 63; 81 P.1842 .............................. 59; 60; 87; 91; 93; 95; 96; 98
EVT.1063 .............................................................. 63; 81 P.1843 .............................. 59; 60; 87; 91; 93; 95; 96; 98
EVT.1064 .............................................................. 63; 81 P.3001 .................. 33; 43; 104; 106; 107; 113; 119; 148
EVT.1065 .............................................................. 63; 81 P.3002 .......... 43; 52; 100; 105; 106; 107; 116; 118; 149
EVT.1066 .............................................................. 63; 81 P.3003 .............................. 100; 106; 111; 116; 118; 119
EVT.1071 ............................................................ 63; 114 P.3004 .. 43; 51; 100; 104; 105; 106; 107; 118; 148; 149
EVT.1072 ............................................................ 63; 114 P.3005 ...................................................... 101; 104; 152
EVT.1073 ............................................................ 63; 115 P.3006 ............................ 43; 95; 96; 124; 125; 128; 130
EVT.1074 ............................................................ 63; 115 P.3101 ............................................................ 90; 91; 92
EVT.1081 ............................................................ 63; 134 P.3102 .................................................................. 60; 91
EVT.1082 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3103 .................................................................. 60; 91
EVT.1083 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3201 ............................................................ 90; 91; 92
EVT.1084 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3202 .................................................................. 60; 91
EVT.1085 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3203 .................................................................. 60; 91
EVT.1086 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3301 ........................................................................ 84
EVT.1087 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3302 .................................................................. 85; 88
EVT.1088 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3303 ........................................................................ 85
EVT.1089 ............................................................ 63; 137 P.3304 ........................................................................ 86
P.0000 .................................................................. 42; 43 P.3305 ........................................................................ 85
P.0001 .................................................................. 42; 43 P.3306 ........................................................................ 84
P.0002 .................................................................. 42; 43 P.3307 ........................................................................ 84
P.0003 .................................................................. 42; 43 P.3308 ........................................................................ 84
P.0248 ...................................................................... 104 P.3309 ........................................................................ 85
P.0384 ...................................................................... 149 P.3310 .................................................................. 83; 84
P.0385 ...................................................................... 149 P.3311 ........................................................................ 88
P.0386 ...................................................................... 149 P.3312 ........................................................................ 88
P.1001 .................................. 73; 74; 78; 82; 85; 92; 152 P.3313 ........................................................................ 88
P.1101 .............................................. 14; 15; 82; 84; 152 P.3314 ........................................................................ 88
P.1102 .......................................................... 82; 84; 152 P.3315 .................................................................. 60; 87
P.1103 .......................................................... 15; 82; 152 P.3316 .................................................................. 60; 87
P.1104 .......................................................... 15; 82; 152 P.3317 ........................................................................ 90
P.1105 ........................................................................ 15 P.3401 .................................................................. 60; 98
P.1201 ........................................ 13; 73; 74; 84; 92; 152 P.3402 .................................................................. 60; 99
P.1202 ............................ 44; 73; 74; 75; 77; 84; 92; 152 P.3403 .................................................................. 98; 99
P.1203 .................................................... 14; 73; 92; 152 P.3501 .............................................................. 133; 134
P.1204 .................................................... 14; 73; 92; 152 P.3502 .............................................................. 133; 134
P.1205 .................................................................. 13; 14 P.3503 ...................................................................... 134
P.1301 ................................................ 17; 34; 35; 92; 93 P.3504 ...................................................................... 134
P.1302 .............................................. 17; 34; 35; 92; 153 P.3505 .............................................................. 131; 132
P.1303 ........................................................................ 17 P.3506 ...................................................................... 132
P.1304 .......................................................... 17; 34; 153 P.3507 .............................................................. 131; 132
P.1305 ........................................................................ 17 P.3508 ...................................................................... 132
P.1306 ...................................................... 141; 142; 143 P.3509 ...................................................................... 133
P.1400 ............................................................ 18; 32; 50 P.3510 ...................................................................... 133
P.1401 .................. 31; 51; 103; 141; 144; 145; 146; 149 P.3511 ...................................................................... 132
P.1402 ........ 51; 103; 109; 110; 114; 146; 147; 153; 154 P.3521 .................................................................. 60; 95
P.1403 .................................................. 31; 51; 146; 147 P.3522 .................................................................. 60; 95
P.1430 ............................................................ 19; 32; 50 P.3523 ............................................................ 55; 95; 97
P.1461 ...................................................................... 150 P.3531 .................................................................. 61; 96
P.1462 .............................................................. 150; 151 P.3532 .................................................................. 61; 96
P.1463 .............................................................. 150; 151 P.3533 ........................................................................ 96
P.1600 ...................................................... 20; 21; 33; 57 P.3534 .................................................................. 61; 93
P.1601 ........................................................................ 57 P.3535 .................................................................. 61; 93
P.1602 ........................................................................ 57 P.3536 ........................................................................ 96
P.1603 ........................................................................ 57 P.3551 ...................................................................... 136
x MC100 Technical Manual

P.3552 ...................................................................... 136 P.3810 ...................................................... 115; 128; 129
P.3553 ...................................................................... 136 P.3811 ........................................................ 98; 126; 129
P.3554 ...................................................................... 136 P.3812 .................................................. 97; 98; 126; 129
P.3555 ...................................................................... 137 P.3813 ...................... 120; 121; 123; 126; 128; 130; 143
P.3556 .............................................................. 136; 137 P.3814 ...................................................................... 152
P.3557 ...................................................................... 136 P.3815 .......................................................... 90; 92; 116
P.3601 .......................................... 43; 80; 128; 130; 149 P.3816 ...................................................................... 124
P.3602 .......................................................... 80; 81; 147 P.3817 ...................................................................... 101
P.3603 ........................................................................ 77 P.3819 ...................................................................... 148
P.3604 ........................................................................ 77 P.3820 .................................................................. 97; 98
P.3605 ........................................................................ 77 P.3901 .............................................................. 141; 142
P.3606 ........................................................................ 77 P.3902 ...................................................... 141; 142; 143
P.3607 ........................................................................ 77 P.3903 ...................................................................... 141
P.3608 ........................................................................ 78 P.3904 ...................................................................... 141
P.3609 ........................................................................ 78 P.3906 ...................................................................... 143
P.3610 ........................................................................ 78 P.3907 ...................................................................... 143
P.3611 ........................................................................ 78 P.3908 ...................................................................... 143
P.3612 ........................................................................ 78 P.3909 ...................................................................... 143
P.3613 ........................................................................ 78 P.4011 ...................................................................... 145
P.3614 ........................................................................ 78 P.4021 ...................................................................... 144
P.3615 ........................................................................ 78 P.4022 ...................................................................... 144
P.3616 ........................................................................ 79 P.4023 ...................................................................... 145
P.3617 ........................................................................ 79 P.4024 ...................................................................... 145
P.3618 ........................................................................ 80 P.4101 ........................................................................ 62
P.3621 .................................................................. 53; 73 P.4102 ........................................................................ 63
P.3622 ........................................................................ 74 P.4103 ........................................................................ 64
P.3623 ........................................................................ 74 P.4201 ...................................................................... 156
P.3624 .................................................................. 44; 74 P.4202 ...................................................................... 156
P.3625 ........................................................................ 74 P.4203 ...................................................................... 156
P.3626 ........................................................................ 74 P.4204 ...................................................................... 156
P.3627 ........................................................................ 74 P.4205 ...................................................................... 156
P.3628 ........................................................................ 75 P.4212 ...................................................................... 156
P.3629 .................................................................. 34; 75 P.4213 ...................................................................... 156
P.3630 ........................................................................ 53 P.4214 ...................................................................... 156
P.3631 .......................................................... 53; 80; 105 P.4215 ...................................................................... 156
P.3701 ................................................................ 38; 147 P.4301 ................................................................ 70; 116
P.3702 ...................................................................... 147 P.4302 ........................................................................ 71
P.3703 ...................................................................... 147 P.4303 ........................................................................ 71
P.3704 ...................................................... 115; 116; 140 P.4304 ........................................................................ 71
P.3801 ................................................................ 53; 114 P.4401 .............................................................. 114; 115
P.3802 ................................................................ 53; 114 P.4402 .............................................................. 114; 115
P.3803 ...... 120; 121; 122; 123; 125; 126; 129; 143; 144 P.4403 .............................................................. 114; 115
P.3804 .............................................. 100; 111; 118; 129 P.4411 ........................................................................ 72
P.3805 ...... 111; 118; 120; 122; 123; 125; 127; 140; 141 P.4412 ........................................................................ 72
P.3806 ........................................ 90; 126; 128; 129; 148 P.4413 ........................................................................ 72
P.3807 .............................................. 103; 122; 123; 125 P.4501 ...................................................................... 139
P.3808 ...................................................................... 103 P.4502 ........................................................................ 28
P.3809 ................................................ 90; 126; 127; 148 P.4503 ........................................................................ 28
MC100 Technical Manual xi

[1] SICES EAAM0360xxXA - MC100 parameter tables.
[2] SICES EAAM0371xxIT - MC100 parameter tables.
[3] SICES EAAM0199xx - DST4602/GC500 parallel functions manual.
[4] SICES EAAS034101EN - Serial communication and SMS protocol for SICES devices.
[5] SICES EAAS0361xxEN - MC100 Modbus protocol.
[6] BOSCH CAN Specification – Version 2.0 – 1991, Robert Bosch Gmbh.
[7] CAN open – Cabling and Connector Pin Assignment – CIA Draft Recommendation DR-
303-1
Lots of accidents are caused by lack of knowledge or application of the safety rules to follow
during the operating or maintenance functions.
In order to avoid accidents, before carrying out any operating or maintenance function, read,
understand and follow the precautions and warnings listed in this manual.
In order to identify the safety messages included in this manual, see the words listed below.
CAUTION! This indication is used in the safety messages of the manual when there
are possible danger situations that may cause injuries or death if the danger is not
avoided.
This safety messages describe the normal precautions needed to avoid danger.
Ignoring this instructions may cause serious damages to things and/or people.
WARNING! This indication is used in the safety messages for dangers that, if not
avoided, may cause injuries, damages or malfunctioning.
The message can be also used only for few dangers that may cause damages to things
and/or people.
INFORMATION! This term indicates that the message includes useful information
for the development of the operation or procedures clarifications.
Information on the disposal of old electrical and electronic devices (valid for the
European countries that use recycling systems).
The products with the symbol of a crossed garbage container cannot be disposed
together with the normal house garbage. The old electronic and electrical devices
must be recycled in a proper structure able to use these products to dispose of
their components. In order to know where and how to place these products,
please contact the proper town office. A proper recycle helps to conserve the
nature and to prevent harmful effects on health and environment.
MC100 Technical Manual 1

MC100 is an automatic device for the control of a plant. It does not control a genset directly.
Instead, it manages the MCB and MGCB circuit breakers that allow the gensets to supply the
loads or to produce energy in parallel with the mains. It is also able to send start/stop
commands to the controllers that manage the gensets (if the plant has been properly designed
and configured).
For the appropriate use of this manual it is required knowledge of use and installation
of gensets and, in case, of parallel applications.
The device uses a high number of configurable parameters, so it is impossible to

describe all their possible combinations and effects.
In this document, there isn’t a detailed description of all programming parameters: to this
purpose, see documents [1] User’s Manual and the Parallel functions Manual Errore.
L'origine riferimento non è stata trovata. [3] as part of this manual.
The devices are supplied with a generic “default” configuration; it’s up to the person in
charge of the installation to configure the operating parameters to the specific
application.
SICES srl carries out a great effort to improve and update its products; therefore, they are
subject to both hardware and software modifications without notice. Some functions described
in this manual can be different from those present on your device.
All the parameters of the device can be configured directly on the device. Anyhow, SICES
suggests to carry out the configuration of the device through the PC program SICES Board
Programmer3 (hereinafter called “BoardPrg3”) installed on the CD supplied together with the
device and downloadable for free, after registration, on SICES Srl websites. www.sices.eu e
www.sicesbrasil.com.br.
It simplifies a lot the configuration of the device and its use is strongly suggested. Moreover, it
allows the file saving of the device configuration and its following use on other similar devices.
BoardPrg3 can be used on all SICES devices; the connection to the PC can be direct via serial
RS232 or USB, or by remote via modem, serial RS845 or Ethernet. For the use of the program,
refer to the proper manual.
MC100 is able to signal and manage all the anomalies that occur during the plant operation.
The anomalies are classified in four categories, according to the gravity and actions that
MC100 carries out:
 Warning. This term is used to indicate an anomaly that, currently, does not impact on
the plant operation: the operator should acknowledge it as, in a short or long term, get
worse.
 Unload. This term is used to indicate an anomaly that requires the disconnection of
the gensets from the load/mains. Anyhow, there are no risks neither for the gensets
nor for the load. The intervention procedure is:
o MC100 removes the intervention requests for the gensets.
2 MC100 Technical Manual

o The gensets controllers unload the the power supplied (if possible) and then
force the opening of the GCB circuit breakers.
o Then, MC100 opens the MGCB circuit breaker (if it exists and it commands
it).
o Then, MC100 closes the MCB circuit breaker (if it exists and it commands it).
Regarding the genset controllers, there are no active anomalies (simply there isn’t an
intervention request for the gensets): these controllers will stop the engines after the
cooling cycle.
 Alarm This term is used to indicate an anomaly that requires the immediate
disconnection of the gensets from the load/mains. The intervention procedure is:
o MC100 opens the MGCB circuit breaker (if it exists and it commands it).
o MC100 removes the intervention requests for the gensets.
o The gensets controllers unload the the power supplied (if possible) and then
force the opening of the GCB circuit breakers.
o MC100 closes the MCB circuit breaker (if it exists and it commands it).
Regarding the genset controllers, there are no active anomalies (simply there isn’t an
intervention request for the gensets): these controllers will stop the engines after the
cooling cycle. The power unload is not carried out simply because MC100 has already
disconnected (by means of the circuit breakers) the load/mains from the gensets.
 Gensets block This term is used to indicate an anomaly that requires the immediate
disconnection of the gensets from the load/mains, and also the immediate stop of the
gensets. The intervention procedure is:
o MC100 activates an interruption to the gensets controllers (”master block”)

and it removes the intervention requests.
o MC100 opens the MGCB circuit breaker (if it exists and it commands it).
o The gensets controllers, which are in “block”, immediately open the GCB
circuit breakers (without power unload) and stop the engines without cooling
cycle.
o MC100 closes the MCB circuit breaker (if it exists and it commands it).
In this case, cancelling the anomalies on MC100 is not enough, as the operation
should be carried out also on all gensets controllers. An example of “Gensets block”
is the emergency push-button.
AIF It identifies a function for the configuration with the analogue inputs (“Analogue
Input Function”). The number that follows the caption “AIF” is the code to set in
the parameter that configures the function of the desired analogue input.
DIF It identifies a function for the configuration with the digital inputs (”Digital Input
Function”). The number that follows the caption “DIF” is the code to set in the
parameter that configures the function of the desired digital input.
DOF It identifies a function for the configuration with the digital outputs (”Digital
Output Function”). The number that follows the caption “DOF” is the code to set
in the parameter that configures the function of the desired digital output.
EVT It identifies an event in the history log. The number that follows the caption
“EVT” is the numeric code of the event.

GCB This term identifies the circuit breaker that connects the genset to the load (or
the parallel bars in case of plants with more gensets) (”Genset Circuit Breaker”)
MCB This term identifies the circuit breaker that connects the genset to the load
(and/or the parallel bars in case there isn’t a MGCB) (”Mains Circuit Breaker”).
MGCB It indicates the connection to the genset parallel bars to the load (”Mains Genset
Circuit Breaker”).
MPM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
MPtM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
MPtM + MSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
MSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
MSB + MSTP See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
PMCB It identifies the communication bus (by SICES) that allows all devices exchange
information to manage the parallel functions described in the document [3]
(“Power Management Communication Bus”).
SPM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
SPtM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
SPtM + SSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
SSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
SSB + SSTP See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.
In this manual, the modifications, with respect to the previous version, are signalled by a
vertical bar on the right of the paragraphs. The modifications on the fields of a table are
highlighted with a grey background.
The software revisions will be described in different part of the manual. These revisions are
referred with the SICES code assigned to it (which is reported on a label on the controller rear
side). The code format is: EB0220181XXYY, where “XX” is the major version number and “YY”
is the minor version number. Thus, the code EB02201810102 refers to software release 01.02.
The following hardware options are available:
 E620211110100: three-phase mains input (JF) at 100 Vac.
 E620211110200: three-phase gensets input (JE) at 100 Vac.

Front panel
Rear view
Top view

Bottom view

The device has to be mounted permanently on a panel. The rear panel of the device must be
accessible only by keys or tools and only by authorized personnel for maintenance operations.
It must be impossible to remove the controller without tools.
The mounting dimensions for the installation are 218x159mm. The mounting is carried out by
four hooks with screws: once the device is positioned, insert the hooks in the holes on the
sides and tighten the screws. Pay attention not to tighten excessively the screws in order not
to damage the hook on the device.

Panel cut-out:
DUE TO THE HIGH VOLTAGE CONNECTED TO THE MEASURE INPUTS, ALL THE
CONDUCTIVE PARTS OF THE CABINET MUST BE CONNECTED TO SAFETY GROUND.
Protection ground must be permanently connected where required.
The external installation of over current protections is required for each mains and generators
phase. The board input impedance of each mains and generators lines, in normal operating
conditions, is greater then 1 MΩ. Over current protections of 1A threshold are suitable.
The safety heart connection wire, where used, must be at least equal in section as the wires
used to cable the mains and generator voltage line to the board. The section of the wire must
be conform to the over current protections value used.
For CAT.IV application, the max applicable voltage is 300Vac (phase-to-neutral) and 520Vac
(phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is 300 Vac.
For CAT.III application, the max applicable voltage is 345Vac (phase-to-neutral) and 600Vac
(phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is 600 Vac.
Controller can operate in CAT.IV and CATIII condition if the negative supply of the controller
and generator’s neutral line are connected to the safety ground.

Supply voltage Vbatt: 7..33 VDC with continuous operation.
Polarity reversal protection with integrated auto-resetting fuse.
The operation is guaranteed during the engine start according
to the technical specification ST SGS-THOMSON
Microelectronics – Starter motor engagement disturbance.
The device automatically acknowledge the plant operation at

12 or 24 V for the management of the related alarms when it is
supplied and each time the OFF/RESET mode is selected.
Battery voltage measurement resolution: 10 bit.
Stand-by current absorption:
130 mA @ Vbatt=13.5 VDC display lamp off
81 mA @Vbatt= 27 VDC display lamp off
Maximum current absorption in operating

condition (all relays activated, horn, LCD 470 mA @ Vbatt=13.5 VDC
lamp) 280 mA @ Vbatt= 27 VDC
Electrical measurements of currents and Conversion analogue/digital at 10bit: sample frequency 10kHz.
voltage mains/genset: TRMS
L-L voltages measurement

Input resistance of the voltage measurements:
>2,8 Mohm L-L and L-N
>1,5 Mohm L-GND and N-GND
>10 Mohm L-ground
Measurement of three currents with internal shunt with back

current and common CT report plus an independent fourth
current.
It is required the use of voltage transformers with secondary
5A and minimum power1 VA.
Maximum mains/genset voltage allowed: Inputs at 400Vac nominal:

MAX 300 Vac in CAT.IV L-N
MAX 520 Vac in CAT.IV L-L
MAX 600 Vac in CAT.III L-L
Versions with inputs at 100Vac nominal:

MAX 150 Vac in CAT.IV L-N
MAX 150 Vac in CAT.IV L-L
MAX 300 Vac in CAT.III L-L
Maximum currents allowed: 5 Aac nominal; possible temporary overcurrents up to 20 sine
Aac with progressive loss of measurement accuracy
depending on the overcurrent range.

Frequency measurements: Nominal frequencies 50 or 60 Hz
measured on L1-L2 voltages for both mains and genset.
For the genset, the measurement accuracy is maximum at low
frequency, in order to acknowledge the engine start and it
decreases with the frequency for a higher interference
reception
Minimum voltages for frequency measurement:
Versions with inputs100 Vac:
17.5 Vac L1-L2 @ 50 Hz mains

7.5 Vac L1-L2 @ 50 Hz genset
Versions with standard inputs400 Vac:
70.0 Vac L1-L2 @ 50 Hz mains

Digital inputs 8 opto-insulated digital inputs; activation at supply negative

GND When they are open, the inputs terminals voltage is
Vbatt.
Further two groups of 5 opto-insulated inputs with two

separated common supplies, which can be connected to GND
(active inputs to +Vbatt) or to +Vbatt (active inputs to GND).
For all inputs:

Voltage minimum threshold (between the input positive and
negative) for activation/deactivation 2 VDC.
Typical current with active input:
6 mA @ Vbatt= 13.5 VDC
12 mA @ Vbatt= 27.0 VDC
Relay outputs: All relay outputs are reconfigurable one by one by parameter.
Two relay outputs with common positive input, max. 3 A
@30VDC (AUX OUT 15 and 16).
Two couples of relay outputs with common positive input

1a couple 1 A @30 VDC
2a couple 3 A @30 VDC
Auto-resetting fuse and protection diodes from overcurrents
included.
Two relay outputs with dry contacts for the command of the
switch of the contactors, max.10A @250 Vac.
5 relay outputs with common positive input 1A @30 Vdc with

protection diodes included.
3 relay outputs with dry contact NO 1 A @30 VDC
2 relay outputs with dry contact NO 1 A @30 VDC
All 10 outputs have auto-resetting fuses included.
Static outputs 8 configurable GND active outputs, permanent max. 280mA

each and general maximum current for all outputs 1 A @
50°C; maximum interruptible voltage 30 VDC. Thermic
protection for overcharge, short circuit protection and
overvoltage protection included. When they are not active, the
outputs are floating.
Analogue inputs 6 inputs 0..10 VDC:
Inputs AIN3—AIN6 (JM connector)

Measurements referred to GND
Input impedance: 220 kohm
Measurement resolution 12 bit.

Two further inputs AIN1 and AIN2 (JW connector) offer the
possibility to acknowledge the differential measurement to
compensate measurement negative differences with respect to
GND.
Input impedance: 470 kohm
Measurement resolution 10 bit.
Compensation range with respect to GND -10 /+9 VDC
PWM outputs Couple of differential outputs with PWM signal, voltage 5 VDC
and frequency 2500 Hz for the connection to the device SICES
PWM Converter.
Communications 1a RS232 Serial port with 9-poles connector
CAN-BUS, PMCBUS with galvanic insulation and terminal

resistor that can be inserted via switch.
2a Serial port selectable by RS232/RS485 switch and terminal

resistor that can be inserted via switch.
LCD graphic transflective display, LED backlighting,

Display
dimensions 128x64mm, resolution 70x38
IP 55 EXTERNAL with gasket
Protection degree
IP 20 INTERNAL
Operating conditions From -25°C to +70°C
Stock temperature From -30°C to +80°C
Dimensions 247(L)x187(H)x70(P) mm
Weight 1080 g

The connection to the JC functional earth is compulsory to guarantee the correct operation of
the device and to be compliant with the EU Rules on the Electromagnetic Compatibility.
The connection is functional and non-protection; the wire section can be smaller.
Connect the other cable terminal to a metal screw on the control panel (which has to be on
the ground) close to JC or to an earth line, by using the less cable length possible.
The JB connector is the supply connector: connect a continuous source (usually an engine
starting battery) to the 1-GND terminal (negative) and to the terminal 2-+BATT. (positive).
The negative terminal 1-(GND) is the reference and common return of the digital inputs,
outputs and the voltage and current measurements. It must be connected to the ground
protection. The systems that require insulation between the battery negative and the ground
protection can be used but can generate operating problems and may require particular care,
as the use of insulation current transformers for the voltage measurements of Mains and
Genset.
Even if the device is protected by an internal auto-resetting fuse, the use of a fuse for the
positive supply line protection 2-+BATT is suggested.
The device automatically acknowledges, when it is supplied, if the genset battery voltage is 12
or 24V, for the management of the related logics and alarms. This acknowledgement is carried
out each time the OFF/RESET mode is selected.
Note: during the installation, connect the battery positive as last operation, after having
opened all the fuses available in the panel.

The connection to the public electric mains is made through the connector JF of the card.
Three-phase connection (selectable by setting P.1201 a “3”):
 Connect phase L1 (or R) to terminal 3 of JF connector.
 Connect phase L2 (or S) to terminal 2 of JF connector.
 Connect phase L3 (or T) to terminal 1 of JF connector.
 No neutral connection is available
Single-phase connection (selectable by setting P.1201 a “1”):
 Connect phase (L) to terminal 3 of JF connector.
 Connect neutral (N) to terminal 2 of JF connector.
 Terminal 1 of JF connector must be let unconnected.
The installation of an overcurrent protection is required for each voltage input phase. The
board input impedance of each mains and generators lines, in normal operating conditions, is
greater than 1 MΩ. Over current protections of 1A threshold are suitable.
If the option E620211110100 is not present (see 1.10).
Set the parameter P.1205 to “0: 400 vac” to indicate the controller that the option is
not present.
The controller is able to measure phase-to-phase voltages up to 580 Vac.
For CAT.IV application, the max applicable voltage is 300Vac (phase-to-neutral) and
520Vac (phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is 300 Vac.
For CAT.III application, the max applicable voltage is 345Vac (phase-to-neutral) and
600Vac (phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is 600 Vac.

If the option E620211110100 is present (see 1.10).
present.
If it is necessary to connect voltages higher than the limits indicated before, you must use
some current transformers with a voltage on the secondary that is not higher than the limits.
Nominal voltages on the primary.
For applications in CAT.IV, the max applicable phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase

voltages are 150 Vac. The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is 150 Vac.
For CAT.III application, the max applicable voltage is 300Vac (phase-to-neutral) and
170Vac (phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage related to the ground protection is 170
Vac. Note: in any case, the controller measures and works only up to 165Vac.
Nominal voltages on primary and secondary side of the transformer are configurable by means
of P.1203 and P.1204. It is suggested to use current transformers that supply about 400Vac
on the secondary (or 100Vac if the option E620211110100 is present) in order not to reduce
the measurement accuracy of the controller.
The controller measures the mains frequency on the terminals JF-2 and JF-3.
It is required to install an external overcurrent protection for each phase of the

generator bus connected to the device. The input impedance of the controller, in normal
operation condition, is greater than 1 MΩ. A threshold of protection of 1A is suitable.
The connection to the generator bus is made through the connector JE of the card.
Three-phase connection (selectable by setting P.1101 a “3”):
 Connect phase L1 (or R) to terminal 3 of JE connector.

 Connect phase L2 (or S) to terminal 2 of JE connector.
 Connect phase L3 (or T) to terminal 1 of JE connector.
 No neutral connection is available
Single-phase connection (selectable by setting P.1101 a “1”):
 Connect phase to terminal 3 of JE connector.
 Connect neutral to terminal 2 of JE connector.
 Terminal 1 of JE connector must be let unconnected.
If the option E620211110200 is not present (see 1.10).
not present.
For CAT.IV application, the max applicable voltage is 300Vac (phase-to-neutral)

and 520Vac (phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is
300 Vac.
For CAT.III application, the max applicable voltage is 345Vac (phase-to-neutral)

and 600Vac (phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is 600
Vac. Note: in any case, the controller measures and works only up to 580Vac.
If the option E620211110200 is present (see 1.10).
Warning! Do not connect the devices equipped with max 100V inputs
directly to the genset 400V voltage, in order not to damage the device.
present.
For applications in CAT.IV, the max applicable phase-to-neutral and phase-to-

phase voltages are 150 Vac. The maximum voltage relative to safety ground is
150 Vac.
For CAT.III application, the max applicable voltage is 300Vac (phase-to-neutral)

and 170Vac (phase-to-phase). The maximum voltage applicable with respect to
the ground protection is 170 Vac. Note: in any case, the controller measures and
works only up to 165Vac.
If it is necessary to connect voltages higher than the limits indicated before, you must use
some current transformers with a voltage on the secondary that is not higher than the limits.
Nominal voltages on primary and secondary side of the voltage transformers are configurable
by means of P.1103 and P.1104. It is suggested to use current transformers that supply about
400Vac on the secondary (or 100Vac if the option E620211110200 is present) in order not to
reduce the measurement accuracy of the controller.
The controller measures the genset bar frequency on terminals JE-2 and JE-3.
For both the genset voltage measurement input and mains/BUS voltage measurement input, it is
possible to use the Aron insertion of the voltage transformers; this allows to use two transformers
instead of three. The connection is possible on both the 100Vac and the 400Vac inputs.
The principle diagram of the Aron connection, for both genset and mains/BUS, is the following:

The measurement of the currents must be carried out by means of current transformers (CT).
Do not connect JD conductors to mains voltage.
Use CTs that, in conditions of max. nominal current, have a nominal current of 5A on the
secondary side (in order not to reduce the controller accuracy). Each current measurement
requires a power of about 1VA: anyhow, 3÷5VA CTs are suggested to compensate the losses
along the connection cable.
The maximum current that can be measured by the device is 5.4Ac. Once this limit is exceeded
the circuit saturates. However, the controller is able to measure but with progressive
decreasing accuracy down to 15Ac for temporary situations only. For example, for the
measurement of overcurrent or short circuit currents on the plant, by using an algorithm of
saturation compensation of the measurement circuits.
The three CTs have only one terminal for the reverse current JD-4; the fourth auxiliary current
has the reverse separated from the others by means of the JD-7 terminal.

The measurement is carried out by shunt.
CAUTION! For the correct operation of the device it is important that all CT reverses
(auxiliary JF-7 included) are connected to the device supply negative (JB-1GND).
If the same CTs have to be used to supply other devices in addition to MC100, this one has to
be the last one in the connection chain.
The connector JD is used for the acquisition of three phases currents of the genset:
 Connect to terminal JD-1 one terminal of the phase L1 CT.
 Connect to terminal JD-4 a common connection of the remaining terminals of CTs.
The three CTs reverses have to be connected to the negative side of the genset starting
battery.
For single phase connection, terminals JD-2 and JD-3 should not be connected.
The CTs can be connected to the mains lines, to the load lines or to the generator busbars
lines. In parallel to mains applications, it’s better to connect them to the mains lines. You use
the parameter P.1301 to indicate to MC100 where the CTs are connected.
Note: MC100 can work also without current measures. In this case, remember to set
parameter P.1302 to zero.
MC100 allows acquiring a fourth measure of current. For this measurement, remember to set
parameter P.1305 to “1”. Use a current transformer that, at the maximum current to be
measured, supplies around 5 Aac on the secondary side (in order not to reduce the controller
accuracy). Above 5.4 Aac, the controller input saturates. If the CT has to be used to supply
other devices in addition to MC100, MC100 has to be the last one in the connection chain.
 Connect to the terminal JD-6 one CT terminal.
 Connect to the terminal JD-7 the CT return.
WARNING! The CT return has to be connected also to the supply negative side of
the controller.
The rated current on the primary side of the current transformer is configurable by P.1304 (the
rated current on the secondary side is fixed at 5Aac).
Use P.1303 to indicate if the CT is connected to a mains, load or genset phase.
Starting from version 1.28, the controller also measures the active and reactive power of the
fourth CT. Use the voltage L1 of the genset mains or busbar (it depends on where the fourth
CT is connected - P.1302). Connect the fourth CT on the current L1. The power measurements
are single-phase: if the plant is a three-phase system, the controller multiplies the
measurements by three (supposing a balanced load); in case the load is not balanced, it is
possible to modify the parameter P.1307 correcting the measurements carried out by the
controller and equalling them to the real three-phase powers. With this system, the controller
is able to measure the powers on mains (for example for the import/export function or for the
genset transfer), load, or MGCB circuit breaker (see note in 10.9.4).

The controller is equipped with 18 insulated digital inputs; they can be accessed through
connectors JN, JV and JU. All the 18 inputs are configurable; that means that for each input
can be selected any available predefined input function. The following tables list the default
configuration of the inputs. For detailed information on the functions available, see document
[1] and the table in paragraph 7.4.
There are 8 digital inputs, galvanically insulated by opto-insulators. In order to activate an

input, you need to connect the terminal to the supply negative of the controller (JB-1 GND).
When floating, the input goes to +Vbatt. Avoid situations in which there could be intermediate
or undefined voltage levels.
By default, the functions associated to these inputs are:
Terminal Input Function

JN-1 INPUT 1 DIF.0020 - MGCB Status
JN-2 INPUT 2 DIF.0010 - MCB Status
JN-3 INPUT 3 DIF.0072 - Emergency
JN-4 INPUT 4 DIF.0056 - Load function enabled
JN-5 INPUT 5 DIF.0000 - Not used
As default, all the inputs are “active” only when the related terminal is connected to the
negative of the supply voltage of the board; they are considered “not active” when the terminal
is left open. The logic status of the input can be inverted with respect of the physical
status by selecting the box “Reverse polarity” in the input configuration page on
BoardPrg3. The box only appears if the selected function is different from DIF.0000 - “Not
used”.
It it possible to invert this standard (singularly for each input), also using the parameter P.1400.
It is possible to share the same command signal of an input with different devices (for
example, one signal for two MC100). In this case, it is suggested to separate the inputs
with diodes as in the figure below. This activity allows to avoid the wrong activation of
the input when one of the devices is off.
MC100 MC100
JN-x JN-x
To use these inputs, you have to connect a DC voltage on terminal JV-6:
 Positive voltage (JB-2) on terminal JV-6. In this case, to activate the inputs you need
to connect the terminals (1-5) to the supply negative of the controller (JB-1).

 Negative voltage (JB-1) on terminal JV-6. In this case, to activate the inputs you need
to connect the terminals (1-5) to the supply positive of the controller (JB-2).

JV-1 INPUT 9 DIF.0000 - Not used
JV-6 COMMON INPUT
By default, all the inputs are considered “active” only when the related terminal is connected
to the negative (or positive) of the controller supply; they are considered “not active” when the
terminal is not connected.
The logic status of the input can be inverted with respect of the physical status by
selecting the box “Reverse polarity” in the input configuration page on BoardPrg3. The
box only appears if the selected function is different from DIF.0000 - “Not used”.
To use these inputs, you have to connect a DC voltage on terminal JU-6:
 Positive voltage (JB-2) on terminal JU-6. In this case, to activate the inputs you need
to connect the terminals (1-5) to the supply negative of the controller (JB-1).
 Negative voltage (JB-1) on terminal JU-6. In this case, to activate the inputs you need
to connect the terminals (1-5) to the supply positive of the controller (JB-2).

JU-1 INPUT 14 DIF.0000 - Not used
JU-6 COMMON INPUT
By default, all the inputs are considered “active” only when the related terminal is connected
to the negative (or positive) of the controller supply; they are considered “not active” when the
terminal is not connected.
The logic status of the input can be inverted with respect of the physical status by
selecting the box “Reverse polarity” in the input configuration page on BoardPrg3. The
box only appears if the selected function is different from DIF.0000 - “Not used”.
MC100 is equipped by 18 relays; they can be accessed through connectors JG, JI, JT, JS, JR
and JH. All the 18 relays are configurable; that means that for each relay can be selected any
available predefined output function. The following tables list the default configuration of the
outputs. For detailed information on the functions available, see document [1] and the table in
paragraph 7.5.1.

Two relays are provided by this connector. The connector makes available both the free
potential contacts. Both the N.C. and N.O. ones share a single COMMON terminal for each
relays.
Terminal Output Max ampere Function
JG-1 (N.O.)
JG-2 (N.C) MGCB output 10 Ampere DOF.0023 - MGCB static close command
JG-3 (COM.)
JG-4 (N.O.)
DOF.0013 - MCB static close command
JG-5 (N.C.) MCB output 10 Ampere
(reverse command).
JG-6 (COM.)
By default, the internal relays associated to all digital outputs are activated when the related
logic function requires its activation. It is possible to invert this standard (singularly for each
output), by using the parameter P.1600 (that is it is possible to configure the internal relay to
be in normal operating conditions and to disconnect when the logic function associated to the
output is active).
This connector provides 4 relay outputs that, when they are active, bring the voltage supplied
on the common terminal JI-5 on the output terminal. Only a positive DC voltage (JB-2) can
be connected to terminal JI-5, not the supply negative or a negative voltage.
JI-1 Output 1 3 Ampere DOF.0000 - Not used
JI-5 Common plus
output is active).
This connector provides 5 relay outputs that, when they are active, bring the voltage supplied
on the common terminal JT-6 on the output terminal. Only a positive DC voltage (JB-2) can
be connected to the terminal JT-6, not the supply negative or a negative voltage.
JT-1 Output 5 1 Ampere DOF.0000 - Not used
JT-6 Common plus
output is active).

Three relays are provided by this connector. The terminal have the relay contacts “usually
open”.
JS-1 (N.O.)
Output 10 1 Ampere DOF.0000 - Not used
JS-2 (COM.)
JS-3 (N.O.)
JS-4 (COM.)
JS-5 (N.O.)
JS-6 (COM.)
output is active).
Two relays are provided by this connector. The connector makes available both the free
potential contacts. Both the N.C. and N.O. ones share a single COMMON terminal for each
relays.
JR-1 (COM.)
JR-2 (N.C) Output 13 1 Ampere DOF.0000 - Not used
JR-3 (N.O.)
JR-4 (COM.)
JR-5 (N.C) Output 14 1 Ampere DOF.0000 - Not used
JR-6 (N.O.)
output is active).
This connector provides connections for 2 relays. Only a positive DC voltage (JB-2) can be
connected to the terminal JH-2, not the supply negative or a negative voltage.
JH-1 Output 15 3 Ampere DOF.0000 - Not used
JH-2 Common plus
JH-3 Output 16 3 Ampere DOF.0000 - Not used
JH-4 Do not connect
JH-5 Do not connect
output is active).

MC100 is equipped by 6 analogue inputs; they can be accessed through connectors JW and
JM. All the analogue inputs are configurable; that means that for each input can be selected
any available predefined input function. The following tables list the default configuration of
the inputs. For detailed information on the functions available, see document [1] and the table
in paragraph 7.7.
One of the uses of the analogue inputs is to configure the set-up of speed, power etc. by using
potentiometers.
It is possible to use a voltage source externally regulated, preferably insulated and set at
10VDC. The voltage source negative must be connected to the controller JB-1 GND.
This connector offer provision for two analogue input connections. Two ANALOGUE inputs.
INPUT 1 and ANALOG INPUT 2 are not galvanically insulated, but they allow to differential
measure the signal, in order to compensate possible non-equipotentiality of the signal source
ground with respect to GND. The compensation range is -10 /+9VDC
The two analogue inputs allow signals having a dynamic range of 0-10Vdc.
The referring terminals JW-2 and JW-4 are connected to GND by 1kohm resistors; this allows
to avoid their connection to the sources grounds of the voltage signals for short connections
in the electrical panel.
JW-1 (+)
Analogue input 1. AIF.0000 - Not used
JW-2 (-)
JW-3 (+)
Analogue input 2. AIF.0000 - Not used
JW-4 (-)
5.9.3
This connector offer provision for 4 analogue input connections. The analogue inputs allow
signals having a dynamic range of 0-10Vdc. Only the positive signal can be connected to the
terminals of this connector: the RTN signals (-) should be connected to a potential near or
equal the ground of MC100 supply (JB-1).
JM-1 Analogue input 3. AIF.0000 - Not used
For detailed information, please, refer to the documents [1] and [5].
Connector JA allows interfacing an external RS232 device.

Terminal Function
JA-1 not connected
JA-2 RXD
JA-3 TXD
JA-4 DTR
JA-5 GND

Terminal Function
JA-6 DSR
JA-7 RTS
JA-8 not connected
JA-9 not connected
5.10.2
Connector JZ allows interfacing an external RS232 or RS485 device.
Terminal Function
JZ-1 RS232 RX – RS485 A
JZ-2 RS232 TX – RS485 B
JZ-3 GND
JZ-4 not connected
This port can be used as RS232 or RS485 interface. Selector S5 on the rear panel allows
configuring the operating mode.
In case the RS485 mode is selected, switch S4 allows connect/disconnect the 120 ohm
resistor for termination. RS485 interface is not insulated.
If the RS232 is selected, disconnect the 120 Ohm resistance by the S4 selector.
JP connector provides a CANBUS connection, to be used to interface with the genset

controllers for managing all plant operations. This CANBUS connection is called PMCBUS or
simply PMCB. PMCBUS uses a CAN 2.0B interface working at a speed of 250 Kbit/s. Use
adequate interface cables for the connection of the controllers (i.e. HELUKABEL 800571) and
proper terminating resistor for a reliable communication. The switch S3 allows
connecting/disconnecting the 120 ohm terminating resistor.
The CANBUS interface is galvanically insulated; please do not refer any terminals of
this connector to the controller supply.
The connector JP (both fixed and removable parts) have gold terminals; please do not
exchange the JP connector with the JH connector.
The following connectors cannot be used. Be sure their terminals are left unconnected.
 JL.
 JO.
 JQ.

MC100 is equipped with 11 pushbuttons. The following table lists their functions.
Pushbutton Function
MODE UP They allow selecting the operating mode of the device among
OFF/RESET, MAN and AUTO. In order to change the mode, the
MODE DOWN pushbutton must be hold pressed for at least 0.5 second.
MAN: can be used to start all the gensets controlled by MC100.
AUTO: if automatic gensets start is not required, it changes the
operating mode to TEST. If automatic gensets start is required, it can
be used to restart gensets controlled by MC100 that are stopped for a
START low load condition.
TEST: changes the operating mode from TEST to AUTO.
Together with the STOP pushbutton, at the power up it allows entering

the controller special functions.
OFF/RESET: the pushbutton turn all leds on (in order to check if there
are any faults).
MAN: it is used to stop all the gensets controlled by MC100.
AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START: it is issued an alarm (A007) and all
STOP
gensets controlled by MC100 are stopped.
Together with the START pushbutton, at the power up it allows entering

the controller special functions.

Pushbutton Function
The pushbutton only works in manual.
If pressed alone, it allows to command the opening and the closing of

the MCB circuit breaker. If the closing synchronization is required, by
pressing the pushbutton the synchronization sequence is activated. By
pressing it during the paralleling with the mains, it allows to open the
MCB circuit breaker: if it is possible, the controller transfers the load to
MCB the gensets before the opening of the circuit breaker.
Together with the SHIFT pushbutton, it allows to command the opening

and the closing of the MGCB circuit breaker. If the closing
synchronization is required, by pressing the pushbuttons the
synchronization sequence is activated. By pressing them during the
paralleling with the mains, it allows to open the MGCB circuit breaker: if
it is possible, the controller transfers the load to the mains before the
opening of the circuit breaker.
They allow selecting the multifunction display mode. The following 5
modes are available: PROGRAM, STATUS, MEASURES, PMCB, and
EVENTS.
In PROGRAM and EVENTS modes, they allow to scroll menus,
variables or records. Used in combination with the SHIFT pushbutton,
they allow to scroll through menus, variables or records by five at the
time.
▲
During the setting, they allow to increase/decrease the variable value.
▼ Used in combination with the SHIFT pushbutton, they allow to scroll
through menus, variables or records by ten at the time. It works with the
direct configuration of the setpoint on the display.
On page B.05, after activating the genset selection mode using the
ENTER button, they allow to scroll the list of gensets.
If the counter reset mode is active, they allow to select the counter.
They allow scrolling anomalies or statuses if the function is active.
They allow selecting previous and following pages of the LCD display
(except for PROGRAM and HISTORY LOG mode).
In PROGRAM mode, they are used to move the cursor while editing
character strings.
In HISTORY LOG mode, they are used to select the different pages
related to a single record.
► Some display pages allow the direct configuration of some setpoint:
◄ once the configuration is enable (ENTER), these buttons allow to select
the setpoint to modify.
On page B.05, after activating the genset selection mode using the
ENTER button, they allow to include/exclude a genset from the load
function, by forcing it in permanent standby or supply.
Used together with the SHIFT pushbutton, they allow to regulate the
display contrast.

Pushbutton Function
ACK button:
 It silences the acoustic horn.
 It acknowledges the faults (if the acoustic horn is off).
 It acknowledges the protections for the parallel with the mains (page
B.01).
ENTER button:
 It allows entering the program mode. It selects a menu entry or
enables/disables the changing mode of a variable; confirm a new
value.
 It allows to activate the HISTORY LOG function and to enter the
one selected.
ENTER /ACK  It activates the statuses/alarms scroll mode.
 It activates the possibility to change set points out of the PROGRAM
mode.
 It activates the counters reset mode.
 It activates the genset selection mode on page B.05.
If it is pressed together with EXIT, it allows to:

 “Accept” possible faults signalizations on the non-volatile memory
at the start.
 If hold pressed for 5 seconds, the controller carries out an action
that depends on what is displayed in that moment: it uploads the
parameters default values (only in OFF/RESET), it empties the
history log (only in OFF/RESET), it forces the BUS-OFF CANBUS
status, it resets the counters.
See the description of the ENTER buttons ◄►, ▲▼, for the actions
related to the simultaneous pressing of two buttons.
SHIFT button:
 If it is pressed with the MCB button, it controls the MGCB circuit
breaker instead of the MCB circuit breaker.
EXIT button:
 It deactivates the statuses/anomalies scroll mode.
 It deactivates the possibility to change set points out of PROGRAM
EXIT / SHIFT mode.
 It deactivates the counter selecting mode to reset.
 It deactivates the genset selection mode (on page B.05).
 In PROGRAM, it cancels the modification.
 In PROGRAM or in HISTORY LOG, it allows to scroll to the upper
menu or exit the function; if it is hold pressed for two seconds by
any menu, it allows to exit the programming mode saving its
position, for a future modification.
 While pressed, the first row of the display shows some status
information. If you prefer to show this status information
permanently, double click on the button.
14 LEDs are available.
Key:

Led off Led steady on Led flashing
  
Led Function
 The controller is in OFF/RESET mode.
OFF/RESET 50% on: on the multifunctional display, the programming mode is

PROGRAM active.
 -
 The controller is in MAN mode.
MAN  -
 -
 The controller is in AUTO mode.
 50% on: the controller is in TEST mode.
AUTO / TEST
 90% on: the controller is in REMOTE START mode.
 -
Voltages and mains frequency are stable in tolerance. If the mains
 status is acquired by a digital input (DIF.0040), it indicates that the
input is active.
25% on: at least one voltage or the mains frequency is below the
 tolerance limit It can also signal a voltage unbalance on the mains or
a wrong phase’s rotation.
MAINS LIVE
 50% on: temporary transfer through statuses.
75% on: at least one voltage or the mains frequency is above the

tolerance limit.
Stable absence of the mains voltages and frequency. If the status of
 the mains is acquired by a digital input (DIF.0040), it indicates that the
input is in stand-by.
 MCB closed.
 25% on: MCB is open even if it is commanded to close.
50% on: synchronization on MCB (it alternatively flashes with BUS
MCB 
LIVE).
 75% on: MCB is closed even if it is commanded to open.
 MCB circuit breaker is open (if there is not a MCB, the led stays off).
 Voltages on load.
50% on: synchronization on MCB or MGCB (it alternatively flashes with
BUS LIVE 
MCB or MGCB).
 Voltages off load.
MGCB circuit breaker is closed (if there is not a MGCB, the led stays

on).
 25% on: MGCB is open even if it is commanded to close.
MGCB 50% on: synchronization on MGCB (it alternatively flashes with BUS

LIVE).
 75% on: MGCB is closed even if it is commanded to open.
 MGCB open.
GENERATORS  Voltage on on the genset bar.
BUS LIVE  Voltage off on the genset bar.
 Indicates the presence of at least one block or unload.
ALARM 50% on: it indicates the presence of at least one warning, but no block

WARNING or unload.
 No active faults on the plant.

Led Function
 There is a communication by means of at least one of the serial ports.
50% on: the TEST or REMOTE START mode is commanded by the
AUX. LINK 
serial ports.
 No communication on the serial ports.
At least one genset controller (or another MC100) is active on PMCB

BUS.
25% on: communication problems on the CANBUS (ERROR

PMCBUS PASSIVE).
 75% on: communication problems on the CANBUS (BUS OFF).
 No genset controller (or MC100) is active on PMCB BUS.
 The status page is selected on the multifunctional display.
STATUS
 -
The electrical measurement page or the PMCB BUS pages are

MEASURES selected on the multifunctional display.
 -
 The history log page is selected on the multifunctional display.
EVENTS
 -
LOAD  The function “unload” is enabled and some loads are disconnected.
SHEDDING  The function “unload” is not enabled or all loads are connected.
If the controller is in “OFF/RESET” mode, by holding the STOP pushbutton pressed all leds
are on, allowing to acknowledge possible faults. If there is a digital output configured with the
function DOF.0062 (”Led test”), the controller activates it in this phase: use this output to turn
on some panel leds in order to share the test procedure of the controller leds.
It is a graphical display that has a resolution of 128x64 pixels. MC100 uses two different font
types, with different dimensions. The basic font allows a matrix of 21 characters by 8 rows.
The backlight lamp is managed by the controller that turns it off after a configurable time
(P.4502) if no pushbutton is pressed.
In order to turn it on, just press any of the buttons. It is possible to disable this function, setting
to zero the parameter P.4502 .
If the controller temperature is very low, the lamp is switched in any case on in order to warm
up the controller and the display. On the contrary, with high temperature, the lamp is switched
off after a second.
If P.4502 is different from zero, the led will be off for most time: by using the parameter P.4503,
it is possible to force the led “steady on” when at least a genset is started (in order to know the
measurements on display).
The contrast can be adjusted by pressing at the same time the SHIFT and ◄ (to decrease) or
the SHIFT and ► (to increase) pushbuttons.

Fig. 2 - Mode navigation
The display has different visualization modes composed by different pages.

Mode Description Page
PROGRAMMING Programming P.XX
STATUS Status information S.XX
MEASURES Electrical measures M.XX
PMCB Measurements acquired by the line CAN B.XX
(PMCB)
HISTORY History Log H.XX
Each mode has some pages. Using the ▲▼ pushbuttons, it is possible to select the display
mode, while the pages of the selected mode can be selected using the ◄► pushbuttons.
Some modes are menu-based; in this case, press the ENTER pushbutton to select the mode.
After entering the mode, the menus can be scrolled using the ▲▼ pushbuttons.
In case the pushbuttons ▲▼and ◄► have to be used to manage functions inside the page,
it will be necessary to press ENTER to enable the function and EXIT or again ENTER to
disable it.
All the multifunctional display pages have similar structure.
Title bar
S.05 CAN-BUS @@@

Mode
Status Can1: ERR-
ACT Inhibition to the
Page Errors TX: 0 Max: 0 automatic
intervention
Errors RX: 0 Max: 0
Page title Data area
ACK+EXIT 5s:ER_ACT__
Help bar
The title bar, shown in reverse mode, is always present on the top row, and contains useful
information:

 The “Mode” shows which of the possible display modes is currently selected. See the
previous table.
 The “Page” shows which page is currently displayed.
 The title text depends on the selected language. Thus, it will be better to identify the
page using also the Mode and Page identifier.
 If some digital inputs are used to select the operating mode of the controller, a small
“key” symbol is shown on the far right. See 10.2.
 If any type of inhibition that prevents the automatic start of generators is present, a
small lock symbol will be shown on the far right.
 During the data saving in the non-volatile memory, the bottom of the status bar shows
a little at sign (do not disconnect the controller).
Combining Mode and Page identifier allows having unique identification for every page.
By holding the SHIFT pushbutton pressed, the title bar is replaced by the status bar. It shows
cyclically some important statuses of MC100. When the SHIFT pushbutton is released, the
title bar is shown again.
By double-clicking on SHIFT, the title bar is permanently replaced by the status bar (there is
no longer need to keep the SHIFT pushbutton pressed). To go back to the title bar, repeat the
double-click procedure or change display page.
In some pages only, by holding the SHIFT button pressed, you can see a help text related to
the current page on the last line of the display.
6.3.1
This mode allows showing and modifying the programming parameters. See par 7 for detailed
information regarding programming.
In this mode, the information on the system status are supplied. You can scroll through the
various pages using the horizontal buttons ◄►.
Purpose of this page is to report the general status of the plant. It contains:
 Mains status (available, not available, etc.).
 Working mode of the controller (MAN, AUTO, etc.).
 Current status of the genset working sequence (stopped, supplying, etc.).
 The circuit breakers statues (opened, closed, synchronization etc.).
 If any kind of genset “automatic start inhibition” is active.
 If any kind of “load inhibition” is active.
Some pieces of information are shown alongside an elapsing time; for example, during
synchronization, it is displayed the residual time before a “synchronisation failure” warning
arises in case the circuit breaker does not close.
The page S.02 (ANOMALIES) is automatically displayed in case a new anomaly arises. For
every anomaly, it is shown:
 A letter that identify the type:
o “A”: Alarm (block).

o “U”: Unload.
o “W”: Warning.
 A three digit numeric code that uniquely identify the anomaly. This code flashes if the
anomaly has not been acknowledged yet with ACK/ENTER.
 A text message, which depends on the selected language and can be, for some
anomalies, customized. For this reason, when report an anomaly, please report also
the type identifier and the numeric code.
Every anomaly uses one or two rows of the display. The top one is the most recent. If space
is not sufficient to show all the pending anomalies, only the most recent ones are shown. In
order to see the others, it is required to:
 Press the ENTER pushbutton.
 Use the ▲▼ pushbuttons to scroll the anomalies.
 Press EXIT to leave the mode.
Note: if no buttons are pressed for 60 seconds, the selecting procedure is automatically
finished.
Some faults can show additional diagnostic information. These information are automatically
displayed if only one anomaly is active: if there are more active anomalies, use the procedure
described above to select the single anomalies and check the possible additional information
related to the anomaly selected. The anomalies that have additional diagnostic information
are:
 273 – Incoherent parameters It additionally shows a message that helps identifying

the problem.
The digital inputs of the controller can be configured in order to acquire the status information.
Two categories are available: simple (DIF.0050) and important (DIF.0051). These codes must
be set in the parameter that configures the function of the input (P.1401 for the input 1). It is
also possible to assign a text to the input configured in this way (P.1403 for the input 1). If one
of these inputs is activated, the assigned text will be shown. If the input status is of the type
important, this page will pop up.
Every status uses one or two row of the display. If no space is available for all the status, only
some of them will be shown. In order to see the other, it is required to:
 Press ENTER.
 Use the ▲▼ pushbuttons to scroll statuses.
 Press EXIT to leave the mode.
finished.
When this mode is active (scroll), the last line on the display (in reverse) shows the index of
the “generic status” currently selected with respect to the total (e.g. 1/12).
Note: if one of the inputs configured with the functions DIF.0050 and DIF.0051 is not active,
the related message is not shown in this page.
This page is used to show the serial ports statuses. In case of functional problems, please
check the content of this page.
For each serial port, it is always shown the type of connection (direct, PSTN modem or GSM
modem) and the related status (standby, communicating, etc.). In case of GSM modem,
information related to the radio signal strength and the provider are shown (only for main serial
port, JA).

The status of the additional serial port is always shown (stand-by, communicating, etc.).
This page is used to show CAN-BUS PMCB interface. In case of functional problems, please,
verify the content of this page.
This page shows:
 The interface status. There are three possible statuses:
o ERROR-ACTIVE: normal operation
o ERROR-PASSIVE: the hardware interface is working, but there are problems

in communicating.
o BUS-OFF: Gen-set has interrupted the connection to the bus due to too many
errors. Normally, this happens for a fault on the CAN-BUS interface or for a
short circuit between the conductors CAN-H and CAN-L of the connection
cable.
 The counters current value of the transmission and reception errors, directly managed
by the CAN-BUS interface.
 The counters maximum value of the transmission and reception errors, directly
managed by the CAN-BUS interface. It is possible to reset the maximum values with
the following procedure: hold the ENTER + EXIT buttons pressed for some seconds
until the controller shows the message “RESET/DEFAULT”.
This page is dedicated to the controller itself. It contains:
 The language used by the device. It is possible to select a different language:
o Press ENTER.
o Use the buttons ▲▼ to choose the language desired.
o Confirm with ENTER.
Note: if no buttons are pressed for 60 seconds, the selecting procedure is

automatically finished.
 Date and Time in extended format (flashing if not valid).
 The supply voltage (DC) of the controller.
 The internal temperature of the controller.
 Internal code used for SICES password.
 The unique identification number of the controller (ID CODE)
 The controller software code, every two seconds alternated with the expansion
module software code.
This page shows the status of all the 18 digital inputs of the controller.
The physical statuses of the inputs are displayed. They can be different from the logic statuses
if the inputs inversions have been configured through the parameters P.1400 and P.1430.
For each digital input, the controller shows the character “0” if the input is not active, “1” if the
input is active.

This page shows the status of all the 18 digital outputs of the controller.
The physical statuses of the outputs are displayed. They can be different from the logic
statuses if the outputs inversions have been configured through the parameters P.1600 and
P.1640.
For each digital output, the controller shows the character “0” if the internal relay is in stand-
by, “1” if the internal relay is active.
This page shows the voltage on all analogue inputs of the controller (connectors JW and JM).
For each input, the voltage value is shown in Vdc.
This mode shows, by means of different pages that can be selected with the horizontal scroll
buttons, the measurements carried out by the controller on the electrical lines.
This page shows the single-line diagram of the plant. The elements displayed depend on the
type of plant (P.3001). There can be displayed:
 The genset symbol. The symbol is shown in “reverse” mode if some generator is
running, blinking when those generators have not been started by the MC100.
 The GCB circuit breakers symbol.
o If all GCBs are opened, it is drawn as “opened”.
o If at least the GCB of one generator controlled by MC100 is closed, it is drawn

as “closed”.
o If the GCBs of all controlled generators are opened, but at least the GCB of
one non-controlled generator is closed, it is drawn as “opened”, but with a
dashed line on the closure side.
 The MGCB circuit breaker symbol.
 The load symbol (on a dark background if they are supplied).
 The MCB circuit breaker symbol.
 The mains symbol (flashing if there is no voltage).
 The setpoint for the active and reactive power for the supply in parallel with the mains.
The circuit breakers symbol also indicates that it is possible to use the synchronization to
whether command the closing (empty spots) or not (full spots).
Moreover, if possible, MC100 shows:
 The active power and the power factor on the parallel bars (genset total).
 The active power and power factor on the load.
 The active power and power factor on the mains.
 The active power and power factor on the MGCB circuit breaker.
Finally, if possible, MC100 shows some arrows that indicate the direction of the supply power
in the different parts of the plant.

MC100 autonomously determines (according to the configuration of the plant) what has to be
displayed.
Normally, from this page it is possible to change the set points for the active and reactive
power (if displayed), unless these set points are acquired by analogue inputs. To change the
set points:
 Press the ENTER button: the selected set point will be displayed in REVERSE.
 Use the buttons ▲▼ (also together with SHIFT) to change the set point value.
 Use the buttons ◄► to select another set point.
 Press ENTER or EXIT to finish the procedure of set point modification.
Note: if no buttons are pressed for 60 seconds, the set points modification procedure is
The screen shows voltage values (phase-to-phase), frequency and the cyclic sequence of the
signals connected to the mains three-phase inputs of the controller. If the controller is
configured for single-phase operation, only one phase-to-neutral voltage value is shown. The
cyclic sequence status is no more shown.
Every voltage and frequency measurement are displayed in “reverse” and are not “in
tolerance”. The symbol of the phase rotation sense is displayed in “reverse” if it is not compliant
to the one configured at parameter P.3629.
At the bottom right a symbol identifies that the values are related to the mains measures.
The screen shows voltage values (phase-to-phase), frequency and the cyclic sequence of the
signals connected to the generators bus three-phase inputs of the controller. If the controller
is configured for single-phase operation, only one phase-to-neutral voltage value is shown.
The cyclic sequence status is no more shown.
At the bottom right, a symbol identifies that the values are related to the generators parallel
bus bars measures.
This page cannot be displayed if the parameter P.1302 is set to “0” (value of the CT primary).
The screen shows the three phase current measures (in single-phase mode only the first one
is shown, the others show dashes). If MC100 is properly configured (P.1304 > 0), the fourth
current (auxiliary current) is shown too.
By means of the parameter P.1301, you can select where the current transformers of the
controller are (on mains, load or genset bar). At the bottom right, a symbol identifies the power
supply (mains, loads or gensets) in order to know which source the measurements are related
to.
The active powers and power factors are shown, total and phase by phase (dashes only for
phase 2 and 3 in single-phase mode).
to.

The reactive powers and apparent powers are shown, total and phase by phase (dashes only
for phase 2 and 3 in single-phase mode).
to.
Also, it is not displayed if the current transformers are connected on the genset bars
(P.1301=”0”).
This page shows the measurements of the active and reactive energy measured by MC100
on the mains line (partial). MC100 uses separate counters between the energy imported by
the mains and the energy exported on the mains.
It is possible to reset singularly the four counters present on this page:
 Press ENTER. The selected counter will be displayed in “reverse”.
 Select the desired counter with the buttons ▲▼.
 Press simultaneously the buttons EXIT+ENTER for about five seconds, until MC100
confirms the reset with a message on the display.
 Press EXIT to finish the operation.
Also, it is not displayed if the current transformers are connected on the genset bars
(P.1301=”0”).
This page shows the measurement of active and reactive energy by MC100 on the mains line
(total). MC100 uses separate counters between the energy imported by the mains and the
energy exported on the mains.
These energy counters cannot be reset.
In this mode, the information related to the parallel operations are displayed through different
pages, which can be selected by the horizontal scroll buttons.
This page is visible only if MC100 is configured to manage the parallel with the mains.
The last two lines of the display show the power and the power factor set points: they can be
modified directly here. To change the set points:
 Press the ENTER button: the selected set point will be displayed in REVERSE.
 Use the buttons ▲▼ (also together with SHIFT) to change the set point value.
 Use the buttons ◄► to select another set point.

 Press ENTER or EXIT to finish the procedure of set point modification.
If “IMPORT/EXPORT” function is selected, also the powers on the mains, on the loads and on
the generators are shown: the operator has thus all the required information to manage the
situation.
The rest of the visualization depends on the fact that the gensets are in parallel with the mains
or not.
If the gensets are not in parallel with the mains:
The other part of the display does not show the mains status (present, absent, etc.).
If it is absent, the middle of the display shows the protections that have detected the
loss of the mains while generators were in parallel with the mains. For each possible
protection tripped, the controller displays the following:
 27: mains voltages below minimum threshold.
 59: mains voltages above maximum threshold.
 81<: mains frequency below minimum threshold.
 81>: mains frequency above maximum threshold.
 81R: (∆F/∆t) a change of frequency, higher than the configured threshold,

occurred.
 VJ: A vector jump on the mains voltages, higher than the configured threshold,
occurred.
If one of these protections is activated, generators are immediately disconnected from

the mains. The tripped protection is shown flashing on the display until the operator
“acknowledge” the situation by pressing the “ACK” pushbutton: if the mains is still
missing, they are still displayed but without flashing. After that, the display shows the
tripped protections (not flashing) until the mains is available again.
If the gensets are in parallel with the mains:
The central part of the display shows the power supplied by the gensets.
This page shows the information related to the synchronization.
The visualization of the phase difference is carried out by a bar-graph. Normally, it shows the
current phase difference in a range from -180° to +180°. When the phase difference is lower
than 20°, the scale changes to allow a better phase control of the system.
Under the bar, four little rectangles show the status of voltage, frequency, phase and rotation
sense. If the rectangles are black, they indicate that the related status is correct for the closing.
If they are black the status is correct for the closure; if all four are black, the fifth one (OK) will
become black and the closure command will be issued.

The controller shows the voltage, frequency and phase numerically. It also shows the gensets
bars frequency.
On the last lines of the display there are references to voltage and frequency: it’s possible to
change them directly here (manual parallel) if they are not acquired by analogue inputs. To
change the references:
 Press the ENTER button: the selected reference will be displayed in REVERSE.
 Use the buttons ▲▼ (also together with SHIFT) to change the reference value.
 Use the buttons ◄► to select another reference.
 Press ENTER or EXIT to finish the procedure of reference modification.
Note: if no buttons are pressed for 60 seconds, the references modification procedure is
This page shows some information related to all the gensets connected to the CANBUS
PMCB. MC100 calculates the sum of some measures for all the generators and shows the
results:
 Active energy (kWh) (sum of active energy counters of all generators).
 Reactive energy (kvarh) (sum of reactive energy counters of all generators).
 Active power (kW) (signed sum of active power of all generators with MGCB closed).
 Reactive power (kvar) (signed sum of reactive power of all generators with MGCB
closed). Nominal power (the sum of the nominal powers of all generators with MGCB
closed).
 Generator bus load (the active power divided by the nominal power of all generators
with GCB closed - DPRt). It is indicated with the acronym MDPt.
 Percentage of gensets load (rate among the active and rated powers of the gensets
with closed GCB). It is indicated with the acronym DPRt.
This page shows a list of all the devices working over the PMCBUS. It’s very useful to detect
communication problems. On the top of the page, the list of all MC100 devices is shown, each
identified by its PMCBUS address.

In the upper part, all MC100 PMCB addresses are displayed. Note: on MC100, the PMCB
address is configured with the parameter P.3701 and can be different from the Modbus
address used on the two serial ports.
On the bottom of the page, the list of all genset control devices is shown, each identified by its
PMCBUS address. The genset control devices have addresses between 1 and 31.
These four pages show some specific information related to each genset connected to the
PMCB. Each page shows information for up to six generators. The unused pages (because
all their generators are not connected to the PMCBUS) are hidden. Note: the page B.05 shows
the information related to the gensets 1...6. If there are only the gensets 1 and 7, the first will
be showed on page B.05, the second on page B.06.
One display row per generator is used. Information shown are (from left to right):
 The PMCB address of the genset. If at the moment MC100 is not able to manage this
genset, the address is shown in “reverse” mode (for example if the related genset
controller is in OFF_RESET mode or has some alarms).
 The active power currently supplied by the generator.
 The reactive power currently supplied by the generator.
In AUTO mode, MC100 starts and stops the generators as required by the loads. Using these
pages, the operator can modify this behaviour. For each generator, the operator can select
one of these operating modes:
 Automatic management (default). MC100 starts/stops the generator as required by

load. In this case, a “blank field” is shown on the display between PMCBUS address
and active power of the selected generator.
 Generator always working. Whatever the load is, this generator must work. In this
case, a “full square” is shown on the display between the genset address and the
active power of the selected genset.
 Generator always stopped. Whatever the load is, this generator must be stopped. In
this case, an “empty square” is shown on the display between the genset address
and the active power of the selected genset.
It is possible to choose the desired operating mode for each generator directly from these
pages:
 Press ENTER pushbutton:
 By using ▲▼pushbuttons, select the desired genset.
 Change the desired operating mode using ◄►pushbuttons.
 Press EXIT to exit selection mode.
finished.
This page, like the next one, is related to the “load function”, that is the ability of MC100 to
start a variable number of gensets as required by the loads o by the power setpoints for the
parallel with the mains.

This first page shows the current situation of the load function. The first row shows its status
(enabled/disabled).
When the function is enabled, typically only a subset of the generators is working. MC100 uses
specific techniques to avoid that always the same generators are working. MC100 provides
many rotation techniques (by the operator, every x hours, at a predefined time etc.). The
second row shows the currently selected technique. The third row shows the highest priority
genset (the one which will never be stopped, named “master”). It is possible to change the
master genset directly from this page:
 Press ENTER pushbutton.
 Select the desired genset by ▲▼pushbuttons.
 Confirm by pressing ENTER pushbutton.
finished.
The fifth row can show the time remaining before next automatic rotation of generators
(depends on the currently selected technique).
Last two rows show a list of generators currently involved in load function. They are shown in
base of their priority: first the ones with higher priority, and then the last priority ones.
Generators that are currently stopped for a low load situation are shown in reverse.
This page is dedicated to the load function too.
The third row shows the threshold (%) above which a new generator must be started. The
second row shows the current active power supplied (%): if it is higher than the threshold, it is
shown in reverse mode.
The sixth row shows the threshold (%) below which the lower priority genset must be stopped.
The fifth row shows the active power (%) that the gensets should supply if the lower priority
one would be stopped: if it is lower than the threshold, it is shown in reverse mode. This power
can be displayed with dashes if there are no gensets to be stopped.
Last row shows the current status of management: it indicates if and when a generator will be
started or stopped, if the load function is disabled or frozen, and eventually if the load function
is managed by a different MC100 device.
This page is related to the “load shedding” function, that allows MC100 to disconnect some
loads if generators are unable to supply enough power. This page is hidden if the function is
not configured.
It is possible to select up to four digital outputs to be used to connect/disconnect loads from

the generators: the rows from the second to the fifth show the status of these outputs. Only
configured outputs are shown.
The seventh row shows the status of the function: if and when the next output will be activated
(to disconnect a load) or one of the activated outputs will be deactivated (to reconnect a load),
if the function is disabled and so on.
The last row shows the actual power (%) related to load shedding thresholds, in reverse mode
if an action has to be taken on the loads.
This mode allows accessing to the history logs of the controller. Please, see par 8 for deeper
information.

The board manages a high number of parameters that allow the manufacturer, the installer or
the final user to configure it in order to adapt it to the specific requirements of the system. This
document does not contain the list of the parameters (even if many of they are quoted in the
description of the board functions); the list is available from the document [1], where they’re
described in detail. Always refer to that document for the most updated information. Here is
described the programming general structure and the operating procedure to read and/or
modify the parameters.
WARNING: assigning an incorrect value to one or more parameters can cause

malfunctions, damage to things and/or injury to people. The parameters changes must
be carried out only by skilled personal. Parameters may be protected by password (see
par. 7.1.2).
Each parameter has associated:
 A description, variable with the selected language.
 A numerical code, with four digits (it permits the identification independently of the
selected language).
 A level of protection (see next paragraph).
The parameters are grouped in menu, which are organized in a tree structures (a menu can
contain others menu). Mixed menu do not exist: a menu cannot contain both parameters and
others menu. To each menu there are associated:
 A description, variable with the selected language.
 A one digit numerical code. In case of secondary menu, the code is composed by the
one of the main menu, followed by a dot and by its own code.
The programming access can be managed by 4 different levels of PASSWORD, listed in a

priority order.
 SICES password
 MANUFACTURER password
 INSTALLER password
 USER password
Each parameter is associated to a proper protection level (in document [1] this association is
indicated in column “ACC” with letter “S” to indicate SICES, “M” in order to indicate the
manufacturer, “I” for installer and “U” for end user).
A parameter associated to the SICES level can be modified only by setting the SICES
password. A parameter associated to the manufacturer level can be modified only by the
manufacturer himself (or with the SICES password). A parameter associated to the installer
level can be modified by the manufacturer and the installer (or with the SICES password). A
parameter associated to the end user lever can be modified by the manufacturer, the installer,
and the end user (or with the SICES password).

The general rule says that the parameters are modifiable only when the controller is in
“OFF/RESET” mode. Some parameters can except and can be changed independently by the
controller status. Generally, if a parameter cannot be modified, its value will be enclosed
between < and >, while if it can be modified, its value will be enclosed between [ and ]: that is
valid also for the restrictions due to password.
If the operator have to modify a parameter it must first digit the proper password in the
parameter P.0000 (menu “0-Security”), so the board can recognize it as “manufacturer”,
“installer” or “end user”. Parameters: P.0000 The access code settings remains memorized
for about 10 minutes since the end of programming. When this time is elapsed the code is
automatically reset to zero and must be reinserted to access programming again.
The three passwords can be customized for the three types of user, through parameters
P.0001 (manufacturer), P.0002 (installer) and P.0003 (user), in the menu “0-Security”. The
value “0” for these parameters indicate a password not set. The SICES password instead is a
special password, preset and supplied together with the controller (see paragraph 7.1.3).
The following examples show all the combinations of the password assignment.
Example 1: P.0001=0 P.0002=0 P.0003=0
All users are “manufacturer”, without entering codes in P.0000. Therefore all
parameters, except for the special ones, can be changed by anyone (this is the default
mode).
Example 2: P.0001=0 P.0002=0 P.0003=UUU
No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters the “UUU” code in P.0000, he would
be considered “user”, but as no password is associated to the “installer” and the
“manufacturer”, the controller considers him as “manufacturer”. After entering this
code, all parameters, except for the special ones, can be modified.
Example 3: P.0001=0 P.0002=III P.0003=UUU
No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters “UUU” in P.0000, he is considered

“user” and can modify only the parameters associated to the user. If user enters “iii”
the board considers it “manufacturer” because there is no password for
“manufacturer”. After entering this code, all parameters, except for the special ones,
can be modified.
Example 4: P.0001=CCC P.0002=III P.0003=UUU
No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters “UUU” in P.0000, he is considered

“user” and can modify only the parameters associated to “user”. If the user enters “III”,
he can modify all parameters associated to “installer” and “user”. If the user enters
“CCC”, he can modify all parameters of the controller, except the special ones.
Example 5: P.0001=CCC P.0002=0 P.0003=0
No passwords are associated to the user and the installer. The parameters associated
to user and installer are free programmable, without entering any code in P.0000. To
modify manufacturer associated parameters you have to enter “CCC” in P.0000.
Example 6: P.0001=0 P.0002=III P.0003=0
As no password is associated to the user, the parameters associated are freely

programmable, without entering any code in P.0000. When the user enters “III” in
P.0000, he can modify all parameters because there is no password for
“manufacturer”. After entering this code, all parameters, except for the special ones,
can be modified.
Example 7: P.0001=CCC P.0002=III P.0003=0
As no password is associated to the user, the parameters associated are freely

programmable, without entering any code in P.0000. When the user enters “III” in

P.0000, he can modify all parameters associated to “installer” and “end user”. If the
user enters “CCC”, he can modify all parameters, except the special ones.
Example 8: P.0001=CCC P.0002=0 P.0003=UUU
No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters the “UUU” code in P.0000, the
controller considers him “user”, but as no password is associated to “installer”, it
considers him “installer”. He is able to modify all parameters associated to the end
user and the installer. If the user enters “CCC”, he can modify all parameters, except
the special ones.
The parameter value can be read, but the modification can be carried out only if P.0000
contains a proper password. An exception is represented by the parameters P.0001,
P.0002, P.0003 and P.0004 (this last one is the password used to protect to access the
controller by serial ports): in fact, they are not even displayed if P.0000 does not contain
a proper password.
Note: while accessing to programming and setting the password (P.0000), it is possible that
parameters P.0001, P.0002, P.0003 and P.0004 will not be immediately visualized. To enable
the visualization, go back to previous menu and subsequently come back. Parameters:
In case the password code has been forgotten, only knowing the password with higher level it
is possible recover the access right. Otherwise (or in the case the manufacturer password was
lost), it is necessary to use the SICES password supplied with the controller to unlock the
programming (see next paragraph).
For this reason, it is not advisable to not set up at least the “manufacturer” password (P.0001):
if in fact someone else sets up this password or a lower password (even just unaware) without
communicate it, it will not be possible to modify any parameter. Instead, knowing the
“manufacturer” password, it will be in any case possible to cancel or modify other passwords.
Some parameters are protected by this special password. P.3001 (Plant type), P.3002 (MGCB
mode), P.3004 (MCB mode), P.3006 (operating mode in parallel with mains) and P.3601
(interface breaker). The purpose of the SICES password is to prevent changes to these
parameters, which can bring to serious damages.
Actually two type of SICES password are available: fixed and temporary.
Fixed password is shipped alongside the controller and it is valid forever. This password must
not be given to the end user.
The temporary password is supplied from SICES upon request and depends on the controller
and on a random value. After its first use, it is valid for about two hours of operation. After this
time, it is necessary to ask SICES for a new temporary password.
To obtain this temporary password, the manufacturer has to ask SICES by sending e-mail to
techelp@sices.eu. In the e-mail must be reported the Board and panel S/N (if produced by
SICES) with the univocal controller identification code and the internal code. These last
information are obtained from the S.06 status page.
S.06 CONTROLLER
_
Internal code: 2415

Code ID: 000015738FB3
This procedure will describe the keyboard and the display use.

Programming procedure is accessible in all the working modes of the board. Usually, the
parameter change is possible with the controller in OFF/RESET mode only. To enter in
programming mode, it is required to act on ▲ and ▼ until the programming mode appear
(P.03). NOTE: if you are in a mode that doesn’t allow to use the vertical scrolling buttons, press
one or few times EXIT and then try again (this can happen during the visualization of the
history logs or during particular operations as, for example, the setting of the power setpoint).
Press ENTER in order to enter in programming.
At the procedure start, it is automatically shown the menu or the parameter selected before
the last exit from programming (the first time you enter it is shown the main menu).
In the first line are always indicated: current menu name, selected menu, number of menus.
By means the following rows, menu items are visualized (submenus). The item selected is
highlighted in REVERSE. Using the pushbuttons ▲ and ▼, it is possible to scroll the menu in
cyclic mode (once reached the last or the first one, the scroll continues with the first or the last
one).
By pressing ENTER you enter the selected submenu (highlighted), while by pressing EXIT
you exit the menu (going back to the previous menus or exiting the display programming if you
already are in the main menu).
First row shows always the name of the current menu (for example “1-Security”), followed by
the indication of the selected parameter and by the number of the menu parameters. Next
rows are all utilized to visualize one single parameter. In details:
 Fourth and fifth rows show the univocal parameter code (four decimal digits) followed
by the description in the current language.
 The sixth row shows, aligned to the right side, the parameter value, included in square
brackets or between < >.
 For some parameters on the eighth row it is shown a value in some way related to
the parameter current value. For example, if you are configuring the minimum mains
voltage (%), it shows the corresponding value in Volt, obtained from the nominal
mains voltage (P.1202) and from the parameter itself (P.3624). Often this additional
measure is visualized when the parameter is expressed as percentage related to
something else, to show its absolute value.
Use the pushbuttons ▲ and ▼ to scroll through the menu toward the items having respectively
higher and lower index, in a cyclical way (pressing ▲ from the first item it passes the last one
and vice versa). Pressing the ENTER pushbutton, the parameter modification procedure is
activated (see next paragraph); press the EXIT pushbutton to exit the menu (going back to the
previous menu).
A parameter can be modified only if its value is shown between square brackets [ ]; if it is
included between < > it cannot be modified. In this case, it would be necessary to set a proper
password or select the OFF/RESET mode.
If the parameter can be modified, by pressing the ENTER pushbutton the square brackets
start to flash, indicating the modification status. Press ENTER to confirm the new value, press
the EXIT pushbutton to cancel the modification and reset the original value.

If a variable is shown enclosed in angle brackets instead of square brackets, it can’t be
modified (that can depend on password level or working mode of the controller). Existing
parameter types are:
 Numerical: the value can be modified by means of ▲▼, in order to increase it or to

decrease it by one unit (if these pushbuttons are pressed together with the SHIFT
pushbutton, the value will be increased or decreased by ten units at a time). The
modifying is cyclical: trying to increase the value when it is already at its maximum, it
is set to the minimum and vice versa.
 Numerical, with selection among a preset list (for example the number of mains
phases): as per the numerical parameters; the ▲▼ buttons allow to select the
next/previous value from a preset list (pressing ▲▼ together with the SHIFT
pushbutton, the next/previous value is ten positions ahead/back the current value).
 Numerical, with selection of couples of number-string from list (for example the
CT connection); see the description above.
 Hour: as per the numerical types, with one exception: the controller manages to
increase/decrease maintaining the valid values (for example: increasing from “00.59”,
the value goes to “01.00” and not to “00.60”).
 Strings (for example phone numbers): in this case, the display shows also a cursor
indicating the currently selected character in the string. The ▲▼ pushbuttons work on
the selected character (passing to the next/previous character of the ASCII table or
jumping by ten positions ahead/back if SHIFT is pressed too), whereas ◄► allow
selecting the character to modify. Note: it is possible to set the ASCII characters from
32 (space) to 127 (escape). It is not possible to set extended ASCII characters (over
127) and the control characters (from zero to 31).
 Hexadecimal strings (by example the digital output bitmaps): same as for the string
parameters but the selectable characters are only “0-9” and “A-F” (only capitals).
 Bits: Some parameters are managed in bit. Each bit at 1 enables a function and each
bit at 0 disables a function. You can use up to 16 bits. Each bit has a hexadecimal
value. The parameter must be set with the result of the sum of the hexadecimal values
associated to the functions that you want to enable. The configuration is carried out
as described for the hexadecimal strings.
In the description of these parameters, there will be a table as following:
Bit Value Description

1 0001 Enable function 1

If the operator wants to:
 Disable all functions: you must set 0000 in the related parameter.
 Enable the functions from 1 to 8: the value to set is given by the hexadecimal
sum 0001+0002+0004+0008+0010+0020+0040+0080 = 00FF.
 Enable the functions 3,4,5,6 and 8: the value to set is given by the sum
0004+0008+0020+0080 = 00AC.
The operator has not to worry about verifying that the set up value is acceptable for the board
since it is not possible to set up not acceptable values. Obviously, this is true only for a single
parameter. It is possible to set two or more parameters in a contradictory or conflicting way.
These controls are however left to the operator. Operator has the responsibility to verify that
the programmed value is acceptable for the system: wrong parameter values may lead to
damages.
There are three ways to leave programming mode:
 Press the EXIT pushbutton n times to go back to the main menu and then press it
again to exit programming. Coming a next time into programming, it will be show main
menu.
 Hold the EXIT pushbutton pressed for two seconds from any position: you will
immediately exit programming and the next entry will restart exactly from the same
point.
 Changing the controller mode to AUTO or MAN: next entry will be exactly in same
point.
WARNING: this procedure reloads permanently the parameters with the default
values set (according to the access rights).
In some situation may be useful to reload parameters factory default values. To do this, first
at all it is necessary to enter the programming mode, and then keep ENTER and EXIT pressed
simultaneously and consecutively for five seconds. A message on the display will confirm to
the operator of defaults reload.
Note: the default values will be reloaded only for the parameters for which the access rights
are granted.
This paragraph contains notes of general use on the programming.
There are four main menus used to describe the plant to the device.
 The menu “0-Security” is used to set-up the password for all the programming access
levels (maker, installer and user). It lets also the operator to digit its password in order
to be recognized by the device. Finally, it is used to set-up a different password used
to limit access to the device from serial ports.
 The menu “1-Hardware” contains all hardware configurations for the device.
o AC voltage inputs for mains.
o AC voltage inputs for generators.

o Current inputs.
o Digital inputs.
o Digital outputs.
o Analogue inputs.
 The menu “3-Sequence” is used to configure the plant type and the working
sequences of the device. In details:
o Plant type.
o The existence and the management mode for MCB and MGCB breakers.
o The mains sensor (thresholds and delays).
o The “loss of mains” protections.
o The PID parameters for speed and voltage regulation during synchronization
(also the windows for synchro-check).
o The active power and power factor set points for parallel to mains operations...
o Load functions.
o The “load shedding”.
o Other timings and options for working sequences.
 The menu “4-Auxiliary functions” is used to configure some secondary

functions/options:
o History logs.
o Serial ports.
o Periodic test and time intervals during week when the system can work.
o The maximum device temperature, the screen saver delay and the internal
horn command duration.
AND/OR logics are available from the controller version 01.28.
AND/OR logics are simply a list of boolean values (true/false, on/off, 1/0), which can be
configured by the operator (programming), that the configure evaluates and whose result can
be assigned to a digital output or to a virtual digital input. To use the AND/OR logics with a
digital output, use the function DOF.0103. Note: the configuration of the AND/OR logics
cannot be carried out directly from the controller display, but it has to be carried out by
PC with the BoardPrg3 software.

First of all, the operator has to decide if the list of conditions has to be considered as AND (all
conditions have to be checked) or as OR (at least one condition has to be checked). It is not
possible to have mixed AND/OR logics.
Up to 30 conditions can be reached. Each condition can be denied singularly: in the previous
figure, for example, the controller will check that there are no active warnings. The following
conditions can be reached:
 DI_XXX: logic statuses of all digital inputs (physical and virtual).
 DO_XXX: logic statuses of all digital outputs.
 AL_XXX: presence of warning/alarms.
 ST_XXX: internal statuses of the controller.
The following table shows the list of the internal statuses available for the AND/OR logics.
Status Description
ST_000 OFF_RESET
ST_001 MAN
ST_002 AUTO
ST_003 TEST
ST_004 REMOTE START
ST_008 Warning total
ST_009 Unloads total
ST_011 Blocks total
ST_012 Unacknowledged warnings total
ST_013 Unacknowledged unloads total
ST_015 Unacknowledged blocks total
ST_016 Presence of mains voltage/frequency
ST_017 Mains out of tolerance or off
ST_018 Delay for mains in tolerance
ST_019 Mains in tolerance
ST_020 Delay for mains out of tolerance or off
ST_048 Presence of load bus voltages
ST_049 Presence of gensets bus voltages
ST_052 Mains parallel protections active (mains off)
ST_053 Protection 27 active
ST_055 Protection 81< active
ST_056 Protection 81> active
ST_057 Protection ROCOF active
ST_058 Protection VECTOR JUMP active
ST_064 At least one GCB closed
ST_065 MCB status
ST_066 MGCB status
ST_068 MGCB closing stable command
ST_069 MCB closing stable command
ST_070 MGCB minimum coil command
ST_071 MGCB opening impulsive command
ST_072 MGCB closing impulsive command
ST_073 MCB minimum coil command
ST_074 MCB opening impulsive command
ST_075 MCB closing impulsive command
ST_080 Contact start inhibition
ST_081 Clock/Calendar start inhibition
ST_083 Start inhibition because it is not possible to supply in island mode or in
case of mains failure
ST_084 Start inhibition because the genset GCB is not open.
ST_088 Contact MGCB closing inhibition

ST_089 MGCB closing inhibition because it is not possible to supply in island
mode or in case of mains failure
ST_090 Serial port MGCB closing inhibition
ST_091 MGCB closing inhibition because the genset GCB is not open.
ST_092 MGCB closing inhibition for MCB parallel failure
ST_093 MGCB closing inhibition for no gensets available
ST_094 MGCB closing inhibition for test without load
ST_096 Ready to supply
ST_097 Synchronization on MGCB
ST_098 Synchronization on MCB
ST_099 Synchronized
ST_100 Input ramp from the parallel with the mains
ST_101 Output ramp from the parallel with the mains
ST_102 Supply in parallel with the mains
ST_103 Supply in parallel among gensets
ST_104 Gensets intervention required
ST_108 Emergency plant
ST_109 Plant of parallel with the mains
ST_112 Synchronization every second
ST_113 Synchronization every minute
ST_114 Synchronization every hour
ST_144 GCB closed on genset 01
ST_000 OFF_RESET
ST_001 MAN
ST_002 AUTO
ST_003 TEST
ST_004 REMOTE START
ST_008 Warning total
ST_009 Unloads total
ST_011 Blocks total
ST_012 Unacknowledged warnings total
ST_013 Unacknowledged unloads total
ST_015 Unacknowledged blocks total
ST_016 Presence of mains voltage/frequency
ST_017 Mains out of tolerance or off
ST_018 Delay for mains in tolerance

ST_019 Mains in tolerance
ST_020 Delay for mains out of tolerance or off
ST_048 Presence of load bus voltages
ST_049 Presence of gensets bus voltages
ST_052 Mains parallel protections active (mains off)
ST_055 Protection 81< active
ST_056 Protection 81> active
ST_057 Protection ROCOF active
ST_058 Protection VECTOR JUMP active
ST_064 At least one GCB closed
ST_065 MCB status
ST_066 MGCB status
ST_068 MGCB closing stable command
ST_069 MCB closing stable command
ST_070 MGCB minimum coil command
ST_071 MGCB opening impulsive command
ST_072 MGCB closing impulsive command
ST_073 MCB minimum coil command
ST_074 MCB opening impulsive command
ST_075 MCB closing impulsive command
ST_080 Contact start inhibition
ST_081 Clock/Calendar start inhibition
ST_083 Start inhibition because it is not possible to supply in island mode or in
case of mains failure
ST_084 Start inhibition because the genset GCB is not open.
ST_088 Contact MGCB closing inhibition
ST_089 MGCB closing inhibition because it is not possible to supply in island
mode or in case of mains failure
ST_090 Serial port MGCB closing inhibition
ST_091 MGCB closing inhibition because the genset GCB is not open.
ST_092 MGCB closing inhibition for MCB parallel failure
MC100 is equipped with eighteen digital inputs (connectors JN, JV and JU). For the connection
of the digital inputs, please refer to par 5.7.
All inputs are completely configurable.
By default, all the digital inputs are “active” when the related terminal is connected to the
negative of the controller supply (or to the positive for the connectors JV and JU); they are
considered “not active” when the related terminal is not connected. It is possible to invert this
standard (singularly for each input), using the proper parameters:
Parameter Inputs
P.1400 01...08
P.1430 09...18
The previous parameters have a bit for each input:
 A bit set to zero indicates that the related input is “active” when it is connected to the
negative (or positive) supply of the controller.
 A bit set to one indicates that the related input is considered “active” when it is not
connected (it will be “not active” when it disconnects the terminal to the negative or positive
of the controller supply).
By default, all the bits are set to 0.
To each input are associated three parameters.

 A parameter that configures the function (P.1401 for the input 1).
 A parameter that configures the delay time (P.1402 for the input 1).
 A parameter that configures a message to show on the display (P.1403 for the input
1).
See document [1] for the parameters list.
The parameters that configure the delay and the message for the digital input are used by only
for some inputs functions. The following table highlights when they are used:
Code Function Delay Text Description

DIF.0000 Not used -
DIF.0010 MCB status Yes The device considers the circuit breaker
closed when the input is activated, otherwise
the circuit breaker is considered open. It is
used for the working sequence and to activate
the circuit breaker opening/closing failure. It is
possible to start the generators and supply
the loads when MCB is “not closed”. The
delay related to the input is used as time-out
for the opening and closing commands,
before raising anomalies (if the delay is
configured to zero, the device uses a 2
seconds fixed time-out).
DIF.0011 MCB opening This input can be used to issue opening
command. command for the circuit breaker (in MAN).
The opening command is issued when the
input becomes active (then, if it stays
activated, the command will not be issued
again). It can be used instead of the MCB
pushbutton.
DIF.0012 MCB closing command. This input can be used to issue closure
command for the circuit breaker (in MAN).
The closure command is issued when the
again). It can be used instead of the MCB
pushbutton.
DIF.0013 MCB synchronization This function is used only if the circuit breaker
command. is configured as “external synchronizable”
(P.3004). It allows an external logic to require
synchronization to MC100: the physical
closure command will be issued by external
logic when MC100 signals “synchronized”
status by a digital output (DOF.0032).
DIF.0014 MCB closing Yes This function allows an external logic to
confirmation prevent or to delay the circuit breaker closure.
If this input is configured, MC100 activates an
output configured as “ready to close”
(DOF.0014) and waits for external
acknowledge. If a delay is configured for this
input, after this time MC100 goes on with
closure command even without
acknowledgement.

DIF.0015 MCB opening Yes This function is used only when the opening
confirmation of the circuit breaker will result in a black-out
on the loads. Before opening MCB, the device
activates an output configured as “ready to
open” (DOF.0015), if exists, and waits for
external acknowledge. If a delay is configured
for this input, after this time MC100 goes on
with opening command even without
acknowledgement.
DIF.0020 MGCB status Yes The device considers the circuit breaker
closed when the input is activated, otherwise
the circuit breaker is considered open. It is
used for the working sequence and to activate
the circuit breaker opening/closing failure.
The delay related to the input is used as time-
out for opening and closing commands,
before raising anomalies (if the delay is
configured to zero, the device uses a 2
seconds fixed time-out).
DIF.0021 MGCB opening This input can be used to issue opening
The opening command is issued when the
again).
DIF.0022 MGCB closing This input can be used to issue closure
The closure command is issued when the
again).
DIF.0023 MCB synchronization This function is used only if the circuit breaker
command. is configured as “external synchronizable”
(P.3002). It allows an external logic to require
synchronization to MC100: the physical
closure command will be issued by external
logic when MC100 signals “synchronized”
status by a digital output (DOF.0032).
DIF.0024 MGCB closing Yes This function allows an external logic to
confirmation prevent or to delay the circuit breaker closure.
If this input is configured, MC100 activates an
output configured as “ready to close”
(DOF.0024) and waits for external
acknowledge. If a delay is configured for this
input, after this time MC100 goes on with
closure command even without
acknowledgement.
DIF.0025 MGCB opening Yes This function is used only when the opening
confirmation of the circuit breaker will result in a black-out
on the loads. Before opening MGCB, the
device activates an output configured as
“ready to open” (DOF.0025) and waits for
external acknowledge. If a delay is configured
for this input, after this time MC100 goes on
with opening command even without
acknowledgement.

DIF.0030 No voltages on loads MC100 is not able to directly detect voltages
on the loads. It can detect voltages on the
mains and on the generators bus, and, based
on circuit breakers statuses, it can decide if
loads are energized or not. If preferred (and
for safety reasons), it is possible to use this
input to indicate the device if loads are
supplied or not. This information is used when
the circuit breakers have to be closed to
activate the synchronization or not. Note: the
loads are considered energized when the
input is not activated.
DIF.0031 No voltages on gensets Normally, the controller detects the voltage on
the gensets bars by its connector JE. If
preferred, it is possible to use this input to tell
the device if gensets are supplied or not. This
information is used when the circuit breakers
have to be closed to activate the
synchronization or not. Note: the generators
bus is considered energized when the
input is not activated.
DIF.0040 External mains sensor Normally MC100 uses its internal mains
sensor (JF) to check whether mains is “in
tolerance” or not and to detect “loss of mains”
during parallel to mains operations. If
preferred, this input can be used as an
external mains sensor. The timings related to
internal mains sensor are used also for the
external one (P.3630 e P.3631). The mains is
considered “in tolerance” when the input is
activated. To select between internal and
external sensor, use parameter P.3621.
Note: MC100 uses this input to detect both
“mains in tolerance” for emergency plants
and “loss of mains” for parallel to mains
plants. In case of plants in parallel with the
mains, you can connect to this input an
approved mains failure protection.
DIF.0041 Inhibition command of When this input is activated, MC100 never
automatic intervention automatically starts the generators, even if
required by plant logic. In this situation, the
only way to automatically start the generators
is to change MC100 operating mode to TEST
or to REMOTE START mode. This function
uses two specific parameter (P.3801 e
P.3802) to add a delay on activation and
deactivation of the input.
DIF.0042 Remote start Yes If operating mode is AUTO or TEST, when
command. this input is activated the operating mode
switches to REMOTE START. When the input
reverts to deactivated status, the operating
mode switch back to AUTO or TEST. In
REMOTE START mode, MC100 starts the
generators and connects them to the loads
even if plant logic doesn’t require that. If a
delay is configured for this input, the operating
mode switches to REMOTE START after this
time is elapsed from input activation (usable
for EJP applications).

DIF.0043 Remote start enabled If this input is configured, the operating mode
of MC100 can switch to REMOTE START
only if this input is activated.
DIF.0044 Inhibition command to In AUTO, TEST or REMOTE START modes,
take the load when this input is activated MC100
disconnects the generators from the loads
(opening MGCB if possible, otherwise forcing
generators to open their GCB). Note: the
activation of this input does not result in
stopping generators unless required by
plant logic.
DIF.0045 Test start command In AUTO mode, in case of inhibition for the
automatic intervention of the gensets or if the
intervention is not required, when the input is
active the controller mode goes from AUTO to
TEST. When the input is deactivated, the
mode switches back to AUTO.
DIF.0046 Remote OFF When this input is active, the operating mode
of the controller is forced to OFF-RESET, and
it is not possible to use the pushbuttons on the
front panel to change it.
DIF.0047 Remote MAN When this input is active, the operating mode
of the controller is forced to MAN, and it is not
possible to use the pushbuttons on the front
panel to change it.
DIF.0048 Remote AUTO When this input is active, the operating mode
of the controller is forced to AUTO, and it is
not possible to use the pushbuttons on the
front panel to change it.
DIF.0050 Generic status Yes If this input is active, the controller shows the
text defined by the related parameter on page
S.03 of the display.
DIF.0051 Important status Yes If this input is active, the controller shows the
text defined by the related parameter on page
S.03 of the display. The display is also forced
to show this page.
DIF.0052 Configuration 1 When the input becomes “active” with MC100
selection in OFF/RESET mode, the alternative
configuration 1 is copied in the working
parameters.
parameters.
parameters.
parameters.
DIF.0056 Load function enabled If this input is configured but not active, the
“load function” is disabled.

DIF.0057 Import/Export This function is used in parallel to mains
applications configured with BASE LOAD
power management mode. When this input is
active, the power management mode
switches to “IMPORT/EXPORT”.
DIF.0058 Transfer to gensets During parallel with mains operations, if this
input is active, MC100 transfers the power
absorbed by the load from the mains to the
gensets, and then opens the MCB circuit
breaker and leave the loads supplied by the
only gensets. Normally MC100 needs to
acquire mains powers to perform this soft
transfer. If not possible, this function can be
used also in BASE LOAD mode: the operator
must set an active power set point that
corresponds to current loads and, when the
generators will reach this power the MCB
circuit breaker will be opened.
DIF.0060 Load shedding If this input is configured but not active, the
“load shedding” function is disabled.
DIF.0061 Manual disconnection Each time this input become active, the “load
of part of the load shedding” function disconnects one load (if
possible). See the “load shedding” description
for more details.
DIF.0062 Manual connection of Each time this input becomes active, the “load
part of the load shedding” function reconnects one load (if
possible). See the “load shedding” description
for more details.
DIF.0063 Immediate supply Each time the intervention of the “island”
gensets is required (supply on the load but not
in parallel with the mains), normally the
controller starts all the gensets available and
waits for all of them to be in parallel. When
MC100 starts generators for “island”
operations (that means “not in parallel with
mains”), normally it waits that all available
generators are in parallel to each other, and
then closes the MGCB circuit breaker to
connect loads to generators. If this input is
active, MC100 closes MGCB circuit breaker
as soon as the first GCB has been closed.
DIF.0064 kW reference for If this input exists and it is active, the power
BASELOAD from setpoint for the parallel with the mains is
analogue input acquired by an analogue input properly
configured. If it exists and it is not active, the
setpoint is the parameter P.3523
DIF.0065 GCB Status gensets Use this input if the parallel bars are
not connected on the connected to the gensets managed by the
CAN-BUS PMCB “non-SICES” controllers: it indicates MC100
(active if at least one that at least one genset has its own GCB
GCB is closed) closed.
DIF.0070 Alarms When this input becomes active, the
acknowledgement controller acknowledges the alarms, as if you
pressed the “ACK” pushbutton on the
controller display. The horn is silenced and no
anomalies on display page S.02 are still
flashing. The warnings that are not even
active will be automatically removed.

DIF.0071 Alarms reset When this input becomes active, the
controller carries out a complete reset of all
anomalies. This operation has the same value
of selecting the OFF/RESET mode and then
select the desired mode again.
DIF.0072 AMF Yes This input is used to signal to the control an
EMERGENCY STOP. When the input is not
active for the time configured, a block is
configured.
DIF.0073 Warning Yes Yes If the input is active for the configured delay,
a warning is issued: the message shown is
the one set by means of the related
parameter.
DIF.0074 Unload Yes Yes If the input is active for the configured delay,
parameter.
DIF.0075 Alarm Yes Yes If the input is active for the configured delay,
parameter.
DIF.0076 Gensets block Yes Yes If the input is active for the configured delay,
parameter. MC100 activates a block on all
the genset controllers connected on the
PMCB (”master controller block”).
DIF.0077 Warning (MCB) Yes Yes If the input is active for the configured delay,
parameter. MC100 opens the MCB circuit
breaker while this warning is active.
DIF.0078 Alarm (MCB) Yes Yes If the input is active for the configured delay,
parameter. MC100 opens the MCB circuit
breaker while this warning is active.
DIF.0082 Production line open Yes If this input is active, MC100 activates an
alarm and forces generators to open their
MGCB circuit breakers. This function is used
in parallel to mains applications where some
circuit breaker besides MCB and MGCB: if
one of these is opened, the generators must
be disconnected from the loads.
From version 1.28 of the controller, besides the physical digital inputs, it manages 16 virtual
digital inputs. They are managed by the controller exactly as they were physical inputs (without
limitations), but the virtual inputs status is not acquired by the hardware, but determined by a
an AND/OR LOGIC (see 7.4).
For example, it is possible to associate a virtual digital input to the function DIF.0041 (”start
inhibition command”). This virtual digital input is active, MC100 stops the gensets. The
operator can create a complex boolean logic and, according to it, decide which conditions the
gensets have to follow: by inserting the result of the logics in the virtual digital input, it will be
able to command the automatic start of the gensets.

The MC100 controller has eighteen digital outputs (relays), available on connectors JG, JI, JT,
JS, JR and JH. See paragraph 5.8 for the outputs connection.
All digital outputs are completely configurable.
input), using the proper parameters:
Parameter Outputs
P.1600 01...04, 15, 16, MCB, MGCB
P.1640 05...14
These parameters has one bit for each output:
 Bit set to zero means that the output is normally at rest, it pick-ups when the
associated function is active
 Bit set to one means that the output is normally working; it drops whenever the
associated function is active.
All the inputs are fully configurable.
To each output are associated 4 parameters.
 A parameter that configures the function (P.1601 for the input 1).
 Three parameters that define the OR logic on the controller statuses, in order to
activate the output (bit map P.1602, P.1603 and P.1604 for the output 1).
The function DOF.0060 (”Bitmap”) uses an OR logic among the 196 possible conditions in
order to set the output. The 196 conditions are divided in three blocks of 64 each. Each block
is configured on the controller as a hexadecimal string of 16 characters. Each character
represent 4 bits; 4bit x 16 characters  64 bits. Each output is associated to 3 hexadecimal
strings of 16 characters (parameters P.1602, P.1603 and P.1604 for the output 1). See
document [1] for the detailed description of the 196 conditions. If any of the status that has the
related bit set to one becomes active, the output becomes active.
 First 128 statuses are associated mainly to controller anomalies. Note: the output is
activated when the selected anomaly is activated, not the related digital (for example,
in OFF/RESET mode, the inputs can be all active but no anomalies are activated, so
the output is in stand-by).
 The last 64 conditions are general statuses of the controller.
The following table briefly describes the functions associated to the digital outputs:
Code Function Description

DOF.0000 Not used. -
DOF.0010 MCB minimum voltage The controller activates this output to de-energize the circuit breaker
coil (reverse command) voltage minimum coil. You need to use the relay contact normally
closed commanded by this output: in this way, with MC100
disconnected, the circuit breaker minimum voltage coil will result
energized and the circuit breaker won’t be opened, but it will be possible
to close it with external commands. MC100 guarantees a minimum
delay of 1 second between the deactivation of this output and the
activation of the circuit breaker closing commands.

DOF.0011 MCB opening coil This output is activated to open the circuit breaker. Once the circuit
breaker is opened, this output switches off (pulse).
DOF.0012 MCB closing coil This output is activated to close the circuit breaker. Once the circuit
breaker is closed, this output switches off (pulse).
DOF.0013 MCB static closing This output is deactivated to close the circuit breaker. This output is
command (reverse activated to command the circuit breaker opening. So a normally closed
command) contact must be used to command circuit breaker closure: in this way,
if MC100 is switched off, the circuit breaker will be closed.
DOF.0014 Ready to close MCB This output is activated before the closing of the circuit breaker only if
one input is configured as “MCB closing acknowledge” (DIF.0014): it is
deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be closed) when that input
is active or after the delay configured for the input elapses.
DOF.0015 Ready to open MCB This output is activated before the opening of the circuit breaker only if
one input is configured as “MCB opening acknowledge” (DIF.0015): it
is deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be opened) when that input
is active or after the delay configured for the input elapses.
DOF.0020 MGCB Minimum The controller activates this output to energize the circuit breaker
voltage coil. voltage minimum coil. You need to use the relay contact normally
closed commanded by this output: in this way, with MC100
disconnected, the circuit breaker minimum voltage coil will result de-
energized and the circuit breaker will be opened. MC100 guarantees a
minimum delay of 1 second between the activation of this output and
the activation of the real circuit breaker closing commands.
DOF.0021 MGCB opening coil This output is activated to open the circuit breaker. Once the circuit
breaker is opened, this output switches off (pulse).
DOF.0022 MGCB closing coil This output is activated to close the circuit breaker. Once the circuit
breaker is closed, this output switches off (pulse).
DOF.0023 MGCB closing stable This output is activated to close the circuit breaker. This output is
command deactivated to open the circuit breaker. So, a relay normally open
contact must be used to command the circuit breaker closing: in this
way, if MC100 is disconnected, the circuit breaker will be opened.
DOF.0024 Ready to close MGCB This output is activated before closing the circuit breaker only if one
digital input is configured as “MGCB closing acknowledge” (DIF.0024):
it is deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be closed) when that
input is active or after the delay configured for the input.
DOF.0025 Ready to open MGCB This output is activated before opening the circuit breaker only if one
digital input is configured as “MGCB opening acknowledge” (DIF.0025):
it is deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be opened) when that
input is active or after the delay configured for the input.
DOF.0030 Synchronization on This output is active during the synchronization on MCB. It can be used
MCB to enable/supply an external synchronizer.
DOF.0031 Synchronization on This output is active during the synchronization on MGCB. It can be
MGCB used to enable/supply an external synchronizer.
DOF.0032 Synchronized This output is active during synchronization only, when voltages,
frequencies and phases differences between mains and generators are
inside the configure windows, with the same rotation sense. It can be
used when one of the circuit breakers is managed externally, but is
useful to use the synchro-check function of MC100.
DOF.0033 Mains present This output is managed by the “mains sensor” management (checked
with the thresholds set by menu 3.6.1). The output is activated if mains
is “in tolerance” for the configured time.
DOF.0034 Mains present (by This output is managed by the “loss of mains” protection for parallel to
mains failure mains operations. The function works also if no parallel to mains
protection) operations are in progress, so the output always represents the mains
status (checked with the thresholds set by menu 3.6.0).

DOF.0035 Genset live The output is active when MC100 detects voltages on the generators
bus by its sensor (JE).
DOF.0036 Load live The output is active when MC100 detects voltages on the loads. This
status can be acquired by a digital input (see function DIF.0030) or
calculated from mains voltages, genset voltages and circuit breakers
statuses.
DOF.0037 Start request This output is active when MC100 needs to start generators.
DOF.0038 Ready to supply This output is active when loads can be connected to generators.
DOF.0040 External horn This output function allows to connect an external horn (or a lamp) that
will be driven in parallel to the internal horn.
DOF.0041 Alarms reset When the controller start a reset cycle (usually changing the operator
mode to OFF_RESET), the output is activated for one second. It allows,
for example, resetting external devices.
DOF.0050 Load-shedding 1 This output is related to the “load shedding” function. The output is
activated when the load must be disconnected from the generators. See
the “load shedding” description for more details.
DOF.0060 Bit map Setting the output with this function, allows to define an OR function of
one or more status among a maximum of 192 status. See beginning of
the paragraph.
DOF.0061 Faulty device It is possible to configure with this function only the outputs from 5 to
14. The output is always activated: it is not activated only for an internal
fault of the controller. It can be used to signal the fault of the controller.
See 12.7.
DOF.0062 Led test This output is activated in OFF/RESET mode if the operator presses
the STOP button. This operation turns on all the controller leds: use this
output to turn on possible panel leds in order to share the test procedure
of the controller leds.
DOF.0103 AND/OR Logics See 7.4.
MC100 controller has six analogue inputs, available on connectors JW and JM. See paragraph
5.9 for the list of the available analogue inputs and their connections.
All inputs are configurable (for the list of the functions that can be associated to this input see
document [1]).
To each input are associated three parameters.
 A parameter that configures the function (P.1841 for the analogue input 1).
 Two parameters that identify a minimum and maximum voltage for the input, used for
the input scaling (P.1842 and P.1843 for the analogue input 1).
All possible functions that can be configured for analogue inputs provide two additional
parameters to allow conversion of acquired voltage to the desired measure. For example,
suppose to have a 0-10V signal to be used as active power set point: at 0V setpoint must be
100 kW, at 10V must be 2000 kW. The signal is connected to the input 1:

 P.1841 = 30 (“power reference”).
 P.1842 = 0.0%
 P.1843 = 100.0%
 P.3521 = 100
 P.3522 = 2000
MC100 will continuously convert the acquired voltage in a kW value according to the following
relation:
The following table briefly describes the functions associated to the analogue inputs:
Code Function Conversion Conversio Unit Description

parameter n
parameter
AIF.0000 Not used - - -
AIF.0010 External MCB P.3315 P.3316 % Used to acquire an external
synchronizer synchronizer signal for closing the
MCB circuit breaker only.
AIF.0011 External MGCB P.3315 P.3316 % Used to acquire an external
MGCB circuit breaker only.
AIF.0012 External P.3315 P.3316 % Used to acquire an external
MCB or MGCB circuit breaker.
AIF.0020 Speed reference P.3202 P.3203 % Used only during manual
synchronization to acquire a
potentiometer for manual speed
regulation of generators.
AIF.0021 Voltage reference P.3102 P.3103 % Used only during manual
synchronization to acquire a
potentiometer for manual voltage
regulation of generators.
AIF.0030 Power reference P.3521 P.3522 kW Used to acquire external active
power set point, for BASE LOAD
function in parallel with mains
applications. Typically it acquires a
potentiometer.
AIF.0031 Reference for the P.3401 P.3402 - Used to acquire external power
power factor factor set point, in parallel with
mains applications. Typically it
acquires a potentiometer.

Code Function Conversion Conversio Unit Description
parameter n
parameter
AIF.0032 Import/export P.3531 P.3532 kW Used to acquire external active
reference power set point, for
IMPORT/EXPORT function in
parallel with mains applications.
This set point is not the power that
generators should supply: it is the
power that should be measured on
the mains. Typically it acquires a
potentiometer.
AIF.0040 Power on mains P.3534 P.3535 kW Used to acquire the active power
switch measure on the mains from an
external instrument. If the CTs of
MC100 are connected on the
mains, this measure is available
directly by MC100 and so this
external signal is not used.

During his working the board effects some periodical or on-event recordings; they are partially
configurable with programming parameters. The board manages four types of archive:
Events: when an event (previously configured) occurs, the board adds a record in this history
log. The full capacity is of 100 records. If the archive is full and a new event occurs, the less
recent is overwritten (so there are always the last 100 events).
For each event, the following data are recorded:
 A numerical code that identifies it.
 The date/time when the event occurred.
 The operating mode of the device.
 The mains status and the generators bus status.
 MCB and MGCB commands and statuses.
 All controller digital inputs statuses.
 Current active anomalies (if more than 4, the latest 4).
If the event is an anomaly, some analogue measurements are recorded too, linked to the
event. The setting of what event must be recorded is possible by means of P.4101 parameter.
It is possible to record changes of:
Bit Hexadecimal value Description
1 0001 The operating mode of the device.
2 0002 MCB and MGCB commands.
3 0004 MCB and MGCB statuses.
4 0008 Mains status.
5 0010 Generators bar status.
6 0020 Activation of mains parallel protections.
7 0040 Gensets automatic start inhibition
8 0080 Inhibitions to take the load
9 0100 Load function
The following table lists all possible event codes.

Code Description
EVT.1000 Reset.
EVT.1001 New power on.
EVT.1002 Parameters default value has been reloaded.
EVT.1003 Clock not valid (but needed for some function).
EVT.1004 Date/time modified.
EVT.1011 Controller in OFF/RESET

EVT.1012 Controller in MAN
EVT.1013 controller in AUTO
EVT.1014 Controller in TEST
EVT.1015 Controller in REMOTE START
EVT.1021 MGCB closure command.

EVT.1022 MGCB opening command.
EVT.1023 MGCB closed.
EVT.1024 MGCB opened.
EVT.1031 MCB closure command.

EVT.1032 MCB opening command.

EVT.1033 MCB closed.
EVT.1034 MCB open.
EVT.1041 Mains absent.

EVT.1042 Mains out of thresholds.
EVT.1043 Mains present (in thresholds).
EVT.1061 Protections for the mains parallel: minimum voltage.

EVT.1062 Protections for the mains parallel: maximum voltage.
EVT.1063 Protections for the mains parallel: minimum frequency.
EVT.1064 Protections for the mains parallel: maximum frequency.
EVT.1065 Protections for the parallel with the mains: ∆f/∆t (ROCOF).
EVT.1066 Protections for the parallel with the mains: Vector Jump.
EVT.1071 Start inhibition activated.

EVT.1072 Start inhibition deactivated.
EVT.1073 Load inhibition activated.

EVT.1074 Load inhibition deactivated.
EVT.1081 Load function: new MASTER.
EVT.1082 Load shedding: load 1 disconnected.

EVT.1083 Load shedding: load 1 connected.
All the anomalies are recorded using their own failure code.
 2000: if it is a warning
 3000: if it is an unload
 5000: if it is a block
For example, the anomaly 273 will be recorded as “2273” when activated as warning, “5273”
as block. By visualizing the events on the controller, the event code “2273” is automatically
showed as “W273”, the code “5273” is showed as “A273”.
Fast trends: with a configurable rhythm by means of the parameter P.4102 (seconds), the
controller records the following measurements:
 Date and time
 Mains phase-to-phase voltages and frequency.
 Genset busbar phase-to-phase voltages and frequency.
 Currents (auxiliary current also).
 Active, reactive and apparent powers and the power factor.
 Power supply voltage of MC100.
 Six analogue inputs voltages.
 Nominal power of all generators with MGCB closed (sum).
 Active power of all generators with MGCB closed (sum).

 Reactive power of all generators with MGCB closed (sum).
The measurements that are not acquired (because the controller is configured not to acquire
them) are replaced by some display hyphens. This archive has a capacity of 30 records that,
with the predefined time step increment (60 seconds) covers a period of half an hour. Each
subsequent recording overwrites the oldest one.
Slow trends: with a configurable rhythm by means of the parameter P.4103 (minutes), the
controller records the same measurements described before. This archive has a capacity of
48 recordings that, with the predefined time step increment (30 minutes) covers a period of
one day. Each subsequent recording overwrites the oldest one.
Peaks: the board effects a series of recordings of the maximum and minimum peaks for some
significant measurements:
 Board temperature: the maximum and minimum peaks of the internal temperature are
recorded with its time/date
 Total active power: it is recorded the maximum peak, with its associated date/time.
 Currents: for each phase it is recorded the maximum current value, with its date/hour
and with the power factor for that phase (not for auxiliary current).
These archives can be accessed in any function mode and status of the controller. In order to
select the history log, use the buttons ▲ and ▼ in order to show the HISTORY LOG (H.01)
main page. Notes: if you have selected a mode that doesn’t allow the vertical scroll buttons,
you may have to press EXIT once or more times (this situation can occur during the
parameters programming or during other particular operations).
Press ENTER in order to activate the mode (page H.03): a menu for all the archives type is
displayed.
There are two ways to exit from archive visualization:
 Press the EXIT pushbutton n times to come back to page H.01.
 Changing the operation mode of the controller
In both cases, the page H.01 will be displayed, from which it is possible to pass through the
visualization of other display modes with ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons.
H.03 HISTORY LOGS

|
HISTORY LOGS 1/04
---------------------
1 EVENTS
2 FAST TRENDS
3 SLOW TRENDS
4 MAX. PEAKS
The second row always shows the numerical index of the selected entry and the number of
the menu entries. Subsequent rows are used to show the list of available archive types. The
item selected is highlighted in REVERSE. Using the pushbuttons ▲ and ▼, it is possible to
scroll the menu in cyclic mode (once reached the last or the first one, the scroll continues with
the first or the last one).

Then, by pressing ENTER, you enter the selected archive (highlighted); by pressing EXIT, you
go back to page H.01.
Second row identifies which event in the whole list of records is shown. REMARK: the most
recent one has the higher identify number. Using the ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons it is possible to
scan all the event records cyclically.
Each event is shown by means at least three pages; if the event is one of the last 16 ones,
they are shown by means eight pages. It is possible to scroll among pages by means of the
◄► pushbuttons.
Fourth row of all event pages shows recording date and time. On the right, left and right arrows
(or only one of them) are shown to indicate that other pages can be accessed for this record.
Other rows show information depending on the shown page:
 On the first page, it is shown a numeric code of the event and its description.
 On the second page, it is shown the function mode of the controller in addition to the
mains and generators bus statuses.
 On the third page, MGCB and MCB statuses are shown.
 For page 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8, please refer to next paragraph.
H.11 HISTORY LOGS

|
2 FAST TRENDS 29/30
---------------------
08/01/09 17:38:31 ►
Mains:
398 V 50.0 Hz
399 V
396 V
The second row shows which record is displayed currently with respect to the total number of
records (in the example, 29° record out of 30). REMARK: the most recent one has the higher
identify number. Using the ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons, it is possible to scan all the records
cyclically.
Fourth row of all pages shows recording date and time. It is possible to scroll among pages by
means of the ◄► pushbuttons.
The fourth row of all pages shows the recording date and time. On the right, two arrows
indicate the availability of other pages on the right and on the left of the page for the current
record.
Other rows show information depending on the shown page:
 On the first page, phase to phase voltages and frequency related to the mains are
shown.
 On the second page, phase to phase voltages and frequency related to the generators
bus are shown.
 On the third page are shown measures related to current, powers (kW, kvar and KVA),
and the power factor and load type.

 On the fourth page the power supply voltage and the fourth current measure are
shown.
 The fifth page shows total powers (kW and kvar) supplied by generators.
If some information were not available while recording, they are displayed with hyphens.
H.19 HISTORY LOGS

|
4 MAX. PEAKS 1/06
---------------------
Maximum power
17/12/08 10:35:54
345.4 kW
Second row shows which record is displayed respect to the total number of records. The
available records are 6. Using the ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons, it is possible to scan all the records
cyclically.
To visualize every record, the controller uses just one display page, so the buttons ◄► are
not used.
Fourth row shows a description of the peak record shown:
 Maximum power
 Maximum current (L1)
 Minimum board temperature
 Maximum board temperature
On the sixth row date and time of record are shown. On the seventh row it is shown the
recorded measure (power, current etc.). On the eighth row can be shown a meaningful
reference measure:
 Together the maximum currents, are recorded the power factor values.

Besides to the normal working sequence, MC100 includes special procedures which must to
be activated in a particular way. Some of them are reserved to S.I.C.E.S. s.r.l. and then are
not described in this document. Some other instead can be used also by the installer or by the
end user.
While these special procedures are in execution, the normal working sequence is not executed
and the gensets are not available. It is then appropriate executing these special procedures in
phase of plant installing or start up. If these procedures have to be executed in a second time,
be sure to supply the loads from another source before starting.
Here is the list of the special procedures that can be used by the user:
 “LANGUAGE”: language selection
The required operations to activate the special procedures are common for all, and are
described forward. NOTE: all special operations are protected by password, supplied in this
document. It is not possible to modify these passwords: avoid then to disclose them to
operators not interested to special operations.
Before activate one of the special procedure, be sure that the generators can’t be
started.
During this phase, all relay outputs of the controller are deactivated. The loads are switched
on the mains.
Special functions__
Function: [LANGUAGE]
It is required to follow these steps:
1) Disconnect the supply from the board (remove JB connector or open the fuse in the
panel).
2) Wait for at least 5 seconds.
3) Now supply the controller again, keeping pressed together the START and STOP
pushbuttons. In this phase, the multifunctional display shows question marks. The two
pushbuttons must be kept pressed until the question marks disappear. Note: if the
pushbuttons are released too soon, the board will start to work with its normal working
sequence.
4) On third row appears enclosed between square brackets the name of a special
procedure. Release the START and STOP pushbuttons and press ENTER: the square
brackets will start to flash.
5) Select the desired procedure using ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons (until its name appears in
the square brackets). NOTE: this operation has to be carried out, even if the desired
special procedure is the language switch. Confirm with the ENTER button. The square
brackets stop to flash.

6) In the fifth row, it is now necessary to set a password. This password is different for
each special procedure (see next paragraphs). To start the password setting you need
to press ENTER: the square brackets start to flash.
7) Use the ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons to increase or decrease the value in the squares
(NOTE: by pressing the SHIFT pushbutton together with ▲ or ▼, the numbers
increase or decrease faster).
8) When the desired number is displayed in the brackets, confirm it by pressing ENTER.
If the password is correct the selected special procedure starts (described later on),
otherwise the board shows an error message and automatically comes back to step
1.
Note: it is possible to abort this procedure in every moment, by removing the supply from the
board. In each case, at the special procedure end, it is necessary to remove and provide again
the supply to the board to come back to the normal working sequence.
It is possible to change the language by selecting it directly on the page S.06 and
without enter a special procedure.
MC100 allows selecting the language to use for any text of the multifunctional display. At the
moment, the available languages are the following: Italian, English (the default one), Russian.
To select the desired language, follow at first the procedure described in 9.1, using “1” as
password. The board records the selected language in a non-volatile memory. Normally, then,
this procedure has to be executed only one time.
Once the procedure described in 9.1 is over, the display shows the following window:
*** LANGUAGE SEL. ***
Current language:
[ITALIAN]
ENTER:select_________
To modify the language:
1) Press ENTER. Square brackets start to flash.
2) Select the desired language (in the square brackets) using the ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons.
3) Confirm with ENTER: the brackets will stop flashing.
Now it is possible to remove and restore the supply to the board and work with new language.

The rest of the chapter will describe the actions of MC100 on the MCB and MGCB circuit
breakers and the commands sent to the gensets controllers via CAN-BUS PMCB.
MC100 is able to send some commands (via CAN-BUS PMCB) to the gensets controllers.
Almost all of these commands are sent to the genset controllers only if they are “managed by
MC100”.
A controller is “managed by MC100” if:
 It doesn’t have blocks, deactivations or unloads.
 It is not in OFF/RESET, MAN or TEST mode.
 The contact “automatic start inhibition” is active.
 It does not have requests of “load inhibition” (by contact or serial ports).
 It does not have REMOTE START requests, if not received by MC100.
 It does not have the contact to enable the REMOTE START mode, or it is active.
In order to request the start of a genset, MC100 sends a “REMOTE START” request to the
related genset controller (for this reason a controller has to have the “REMOTE START”
function enabled in order to be “managed by MC100”).
In order to ask the genset to stop, MC100 removes the request of “REMOTE START” to the
related controller. The controller will stop the genset if:
 There are no requests of REMOTE START and TEST.
 There are no requests of automatic intervention, or the request of “automatic start

inhibition” by contact is active.
The two previous conditions are necessary in order to get the genset controller “managed by
MC100”.
in particular conditions, and only if MGCB is present, MC100 is able to request the opening of
the GCB circuit breakers of the gensets controllers. To do this, MC100 sends a command of
“load inhibition” to the genset controllers. When the opening of the GCB circuit breakers is not
required, MC100 removes the request of “load inhibition”: the genset controllers will close the
GCB circuit breakers only if there are no requests of “load inhibition” (necessary condition to
get the OFF/RESET, MAN o TEST).
The active operating mode is displayed through the leds OFF/RESET, MAN e AUTO. MC100
has three main operating modes:
 OFF/RESET: the MGCB is open to disconnect the gensets from the loads and/or the
mains (if it exists and if it is commanded by MC100). The MCB is closed to connect
the loads to the mains (if it exists and if it is commanded by MC100). MC100 removes
all the requests of gensets start. If they are “managed by MC100”, they are stopped.
All anomalies are cancelled and it is possible to access the programming in order to
modify the parameters.
 MAN: the start and the stop of the gensets “managed by MC100” are managed by the
operator. The opening/closing of the two circuit breakers (if they are present and
commanded by MC100) are managed by the operator. The controller automatically
activates the synchronization procedure (if required) following the manual command

of the circuit breaker closing by the operator. The protections are active: MC100 is
always able to open the MGCB circuit breaker (if present) and remove the requests of
gensets start. It is allowed to access programming but only few parameters can be
changed.
 AUTO: the start and the stop of the gensets “managed by MC100” and the
management of the MGCB and MCB circuit breakers are managed by the controller
(the operator cannot intervene). All the protections are enabled. It is allowed to access
programming but only few parameters can be changed.
The main operating mode can be selected in two ways:
 They use the MODE UP and MODE DOWN buttons located on the controller.
 Using one or more digital inputs, configured with the following functions:
o DIF.0046 - “remote OFF/RESET”.
o DIF.0047 - “remote MAN”.
o DIF.0048 - “remote AUTO”.

When one of these inputs is active, the operating mode is forced, and it is no more
possible to use the pushbuttons to change it (the first row of the display shows a “key”
symbol to warn the operator about this situation).
When none of these inputs is active, it is again possible to use the pushbuttons to
change the operating mode.
If more than one input is active at the same time, the input configured to force the
OFF-RESET mode has high priority, followed by the one which forces the MAN mode
and last by the input which forces the AUTO mode.
It is also possible to use only one or two inputs. For example, It’s possible to use only
one input to force the AUTO mode: when the input is active, the controller is forced in
AUTO mode, when the input is not active the controller remains in AUTO, but the
pushbuttons can be used to select a different mode.
If it is used only one input to force the OFF-RESET mode, the controller acts in
a different way: when the input is active the controller is forced in OFF-RESET,
when the input become not active the operating mode goes back to the mode
active before the input activation.
When the MC100 main operating mode is AUTO, it is possible to activate two further modes
(remember that the controller is in AUTO anyway, as described before):
 TEST: this operating mode differs from AUTO, as MC100 still requires the start of the
gensets “managed by MC100”, without considering that the conditions of the plant
require the automatic intervention of the gensets or not (the “automatic intervention
inhibition” are ignored in this mode). By parameter P.4301, it is possible to choose if
the board has or has not to connect the load to generators. When the controller goes
back to AUTO (when the test ends), the loads are automatically switched on the load
and the gensets are stopped with the normal procedure. If possible, the switch of the
loads between loads and gensets is carried out by avoiding their black-out. The board
will pass automatically from TEST to AUTO if the conditions for an automatic gensets
intervention are verified. It is allowed to access programming but only few parameters
can be changed.
To go to the TEST mode, the controller has to be in AUTO, there mustn’t be blocks or
unloads, there mustn’t be REMOTE START requests (see later) and there mustn’t be
requests of automatic intervention of the gensets.
If in test mode, the AUTO/TEST indicator flashes at a duty of 50%.
Note: the request of switch to TEST is lost if there is a request of gensets automatic
intervention (for example in case of mains failure): when the request of automatic

intervention stops, the controller will go back to TEST. An exception is represented by
the TEST mode request from digital input: when the request of automatic intervention
stops, if the input is still active the controller will go back to TEST.
If no start requests are pending, it is possible to activate the TEST mode in one of the
following ways:
o Press the START pushbutton on the controller. The mode change is

immediate. To return to AUTO mode, press the START pushbutton again.
o By using a configured digital input with the function DIF.0045 (”Command of

test start”): the controller goes to TEST when this input is activated and goes
back to AUTO when it is deactivated.
o By configuring the parameters properly:
 P.4302 (“Weekly test calendar”).
 P.4303 (“Test starting time”).
 P.4304 (“Test starting duration”).
They allow to select the days of the week and the hour in which the mode
is switched from AUTO to TEST. The controller goes back to AUTO at the
end of the TEST time configured.
o Via SMS (see document [4]). To use this possibility, it is necessary that the
parameter P.4304 (”Test starting duration”) is different from zero. In this case
the board enters TEST mode as soon as received the SMS message and
comes back to AUTO mode after the time P.4304
o Via serial ports command. Use the Modbus register HOLDING REGISTER
20: by inserting the value “6”, the controller goes to TEST, by inserting the
value “7”, it goes to AUTO. The TEST command from the serial ports is
cancelled if the communication is stopped (60 seconds without messages).
 REMOTE TEST: this operating mode differs from AUTO, as MC100 still requires the
start of the gensets “managed by MC100”, without considering that the conditions of
the plant require the automatic intervention of the gensets or not (the “automatic
intervention inhibition” are ignored in this mode). If there are no requests of “inhibition
to take the load”, the loads are switched on the gensets. The operator cannot
command the circuit breakers manually. When this REMOTE START mode is
deactivated, the controller goes back to AUTO and, if the automatic intervention of the
gensets is not requested, the controller opens the MGCB circuit breaker and removes
the start requests of the gensets “managed by MC100”. It is allowed to access
programming but only few parameters can be changed.
To switch to the REMOTE START mode, the controller has to be in AUTO or TEST
and there mustn’t be blocks or unloads. Moreover, it is possible to configure an input
with the function DIF.0043 (”remote start enabled”): if this input exists, it must be
active.
If in REMOTE START mode, the AUTO/TEST indicator flashes at a duty of 90%.
It is possible to activate the REMOTE START mode in one of the following ways:
o By means of a digital input configured with the function DIF.0042 (”remote start
command”). In this case, it is necessary to pay attention to the delay configured:
the controller is in REMOTE START when the input is activated by the time
configured and in AUTO once the input is deactivated.
o By configuring the parameters properly:

 P.4411 (“Calendar for forced intervention”).
 P.4412 (“Forcing start time”).
 P.4413 (“Forcing end time”).
They allow to select the days of the week and the hour in which the mode is
switched from AUTO to REMOTE START. The board comes back to AUTO
mode at the end of the configured time interval.
o Via SMS (see document [4]). In this case, the controller switch to REMOTE
START as soon it receives the message, and switch back to AUTO receiving a
message with the opposite command.
o Via serial ports command. Use the Modbus register HOLDING REGISTER 20:
by inserting the value “18”, the controller goes to REMOTE START, by inserting
the value “19”, it goes to AUTO. The REMOTE START command by serial ports
is not cancelled in case of communication stop.
The controller records the following events if the operating mode changes (if enabled with bit
1 in P.0441):
 EVT.1011: the new mode is “OFF/RESET”.
 EVT.1012: the new mode is “MAN”.
 EVT.1013: the new mode is “AUTO”.
 EVT.1014: the new mode is “TEST”.
 EVT.1015: the new mode is “REMOTE START”.
The following functions for the configuration of the digital outputs are connected to the
operating mode of the controller:
 DOF.0060 (”Bit map”): the single bits that indicate OFF/RESET, MAN, AUTO, TEST
and AVVIAMENTO REMOTO are available.

MC100 acquires mains voltages and frequency, for three main purposes:
 “AMF”. MC100 must detect all anomalies about the mains in order to start the
generators and make them supply the loads. In the same way, MC100 detects when
mains voltages and frequency are back to their operating values to connect loads to
mains and stop the generators.
 “Protections for the parallel with the mains (PPR)” MC100 must detect the “loss
of mains” while generators are in parallel with mains, in order to disconnect them from
the mains (generator can in this case supply loads or not depending on plant
configuration). In the same way, when generators are disconnected from the mains,
MC100 detects when mains voltages and frequency are back to their operating values
in order to put generators in parallel with mains again.
 For synchronization purpose. See description of this function in its dedicated

paragraph 10.7.
MC100 uses three different sets of parameters for these purposes.
Normally, the controller uses its internal sensor (JF) to measure the mains. For the first two
functions, it’s possible to use an external sensor alternatively (for the synchronization you must
use the internal sensor).
There are some parameters for the configuration of the internal sensor that do not depend on
its use:
 P.1001: nominal frequency (Hz).
 P.1201: it indicates if the mains is three-phase (3) or single-phase (1).
 P.1202: nominal voltage. Its value must be the nominal phase-to-phase voltage for
three-phase systems and phase–to–neutral voltage for single-phase systems.
 P.1203: primary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JF

connector.
 P.1204: secondary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JF

connector.
For the connection of the voltage lines, see paragraph 5.3.
Note: set the nominal voltage to a value different from zero.
The mains status is displayed by means of the signal led MAINS LIVE (see 6.2).
This function must detect all anomalies on the mains voltage, in order to start the gensets and
connect the loads to them.
Usually, this function is not used if the gensets are in parallel with the mains, Anyhow, if the
parallel protections trigger while the gensets are in parallel with the mains, the mains is
considered “off” in case of automatic mains failure too (see 10.3.2).
The parameter P.3621 allows to set whether to use the internal sensor (”0”) or the external
one (”1”).
To use an external mains sensor, P.3621 must be set to 1.

The external mains sensor must be connected to a digital input configured with the function
DIF.0040 (”external mains sensor”). Mains is “in tolerance” when this input is “active” (logical
state), is “Absent” when the input is “not active”.
In order to define the mains status, the controller can carry out up to four different checks.
They are described below one by one (with examples).
Parameter Description Default value Frequency (Hz)

P.1001 Rated frequency 50 Hz 50.00
P.3626 Low frequency threshold 90.0 % 45.00
P.3627 High frequency threshold 110.0 % 55.00
P.3623 Hysteresis 2.5 % 1.25
The hysteresis is applied:
 Upwards the low frequency threshold (so, the parameters default values are between
45.00 Hz and 46.25 Hz).
 Downwards the high frequency threshold (so, the parameters default values are
between 53.75 Hz and 55.00 Hz).
Considering these values we can detect the following bands:

0.00 V .
Band A: absent
45.00 V .
Band B: hysteresis
46.25 V .
Band C: in tolerance
53.75 V .
Band D: hysteresis
55.00 V .
Band G: high
xxx V .
If the frequency is in the B or D bands, the controller maintains its previous status (hysteresis).
For example, if the voltage was in C band and now it is in D band, it is considered “in tolerance”
anyway. If instead, the frequency was in A band and now it is in B band, it is considered “off”.
Parameter Description Default value Voltage (Vac)

P.1201 Phases number 3 -
P.1202 Rated voltage 400 Vac 400
P.3622 Mains presence threshold 17.5 % 70
P.3624 Low voltage threshold 80.0 % 320
P.3625 High voltage threshold 110.0 % 440
P.3623 Maximum hysteresis 2.5 % 10
The hysteresis is applied:
 Upwards the mains presence threshold (so, the parameters default values are
between 70 Vac and 80 Vac).
 Upwards the low voltage threshold (so, the parameters default values are between
320 Vac and 330 Vac).

 Upwards the high voltage threshold (so, the parameters default values are between
430 Vac and 440 Vac).
Considering these values we can detect the following bands:

0 V .
Band A: absent
70 V .
Band B: hysteresis
80 V .
Band C: low
320 V .
Band D: hysteresis
330 V .
Band E: in tolerance
430 V .
Band F: hysteresis
440 V .
Band G: high
XXX V .
If the voltages are in the B, D or F bands, the controller maintains its previous status
(hysteresis). For example, if the voltage was in E band and now it is in D band, it is considered
“in tolerance” in any case. If instead, the voltage was in C band and now it is in D band, it is
considered “low”.
Such statuses are managed for each phase.
Parameter Description Default value Voltage (Volt)

P.1202 Rated voltage 400 Vac 400
P.3628 Mains asymmetry threshold 10.0 % 40
On three-phase systems, it is possible to consider the mains “out of tolerance” if the three
phase-to-phase voltages are higher (in absolute value) than the threshold set. The check is
disabled on single-phase systems.
Note: MC100 does not carry out any check on the discrepancy of the three phases, but only
on the range of the phase-to-phase voltages.
On this threshold no hysteresis is applied. With the parameters default values, if the difference
between two phase-to-phase voltages in absolute value is higher than 40 Vac, the mains is
considered out of tolerance; otherwise, it is considered in tolerance.
Parameter Description Default value

P.3629 Phase sequence required 0-None
In three-phase systems, it is possible to consider the mains “out of tolerance” if the phases
cycling sense is different from what specified in the parameter P.3629. In single-phase system,
this control is disabled.
To disable this control, simply set the parameter P.3629 to “0-None”.
With the parameter P.3629, it is possible to select the cycling sense required by the mains: “1-
Clockwise” or “2-Counter-clockwise” The mains is considered “out of tolerance” if the cycling
sense is different from the one set.
In order to diagnose the mains “global” status, the following algorithms are utilized, shown in
their computing order:
 If frequency and all voltages are in the “Off” status, the general status is “Off” too.

 If frequency and all voltages are in the “In tolerance” status, the general status is “In
tolerance” too. In this case, if the cycling sense or asymmetry checks don’t give
positive results, the mains is considered “Low”.
 If frequency or at least one voltage is in the “High” status, the general status is
“High” too.
 If no one of the previous conditions is verified, the global status is “Low”.
Whatever method is used to acquire the instantaneous status of the mains (internal or external
sensor), for the operating logics of the plant the general status of the mains is described in
four phases:
Mains in
tolerance
Rete fuori tolleranza
Trascorso il tempo
impostato con P.3631
(0 secondi in MAN)
Rete in tolleranza
Delay mains
Delay mains failure
presence Mains in tolerance
Trascorso il tempo impostato

Mains out of con P.3630 (due secondi se
Rete fuori tolleranza tolerance almeno un generatore è
“pronto ad erogare” o ha il
GCB chiuso, 0 secondi se
MGCB esiste ed è già
chiuso).
The controller records the following events if the mains status changes (if enabled with bit 4 in
P.0441):
 EVT.1041: the new mains status is permanently “off or out of tolerance”.
 EVT.1042: the new mains status is “present or in tolerance”.
 EVT.1043: the new mains status is permanently “in tolerance”.
The following functions for the configuration of the digital outputs are connected to the mains
status:
 DOF.0033 (”Mains live (by mains sensor)”): the output is activated if the mains is
permanently in tolerance, or during the delay for the “mains out of tolerance”.
This function must detect an anomaly on the mains voltage while the gensets are in parallel
with the mains, in order to disconnect the gensets from the mains.
It is possible to use the internal sensor of the controller or an external protection.
Note: if there is an external sensor, the internal one is ignored.

In some cases, the “loss of mains” protection of MC100 could be not suitable. For example,
for Italy market we need a “certified protections relay”. If you cannot use (or you don’t want to)
MC100 to detect the “mains failure”, it is possible to connect an external protection to a MC100
digital input, configured with the function DIF.0040 (”External mains sensor”). In this case,
mains is “present” when the input is active (logical status).
The controller uses up to six different techniques to detect the “mains failure” during parallel,
in order to disconnect the gensets from the mains. Next paragraphs describe these
techniques, reporting for each the relevant parameters.
When the mains fails, the voltage on the gensets tends to:
 Decrease, if suddenly they have to supply a power higher than the one they were
supplying (the loads connected to the gensets are higher than their rated power).
 Increase, if suddenly they have to supply a power lower than the one they were
supplying (the mains failure disconnected the gensets from loads).
The two following protections detect exactly these conditions. Parameter P.3603 is common
to both protections: it is the hysteresis (percentage of P.1202) applied to all voltages-related
thresholds.
If both protections are enabled, please check the following:
(P.3604 + P.3603) < (P.3606 - P.3603)
Low voltage (27U<)
This protection detects the “loss of mains” from a decrease of voltages. It is configured by the
following parameters (menu 3.6.0):
 P.3604: low voltages threshold (percentage of a P.1202), under which mains is

considered “fault”.
 P.3605: delay related with low voltages threshold.
This protection can be disabled by setting parameter P.3605 to zero.
If the protection is enabled, mains is “fault” if at least one voltage is below the P.3604 threshold
continuously for the P.3605 delay. Mains is “in tolerance” if all voltages are above the P.3604
+ P.3603 threshold (hysteresis), except it is detected “fault” by another protection.
High voltage (59U>)
This protection detects the “loss of mains” from an increase of voltages. It is configured by the
following parameters (menu 3.6.0):
 P.3606: high voltages threshold (percentage of a P.1202), over which mains is

 P.3607: delay related with high voltages threshold.
If the protection is enabled, mains is “fault” if at least one voltage is above the P.3606 threshold
continuously for the P.3607 delay. Mains is “in tolerance” if all voltages are below the P.3606
- P.3603 threshold (hysteresis), except it is detected “fault” by another protection.
When the mains fails, the frequency on the gensets tends to:

 Decrease, if suddenly they have to supply a power higher than the one they were
supplying (the loads connected to the gensets are higher than their rated power).
 Increase, if suddenly they have to supply a power lower than the one they were
supplying (the mains failure disconnected the gensets from loads).
The two following protections detect exactly these conditions. Parameter P.3608 is common
to both protections: it is the hysteresis (percentage of P.1001) applied to all frequency-related
thresholds.
If both protections are enabled, please check the following:
(P.3609 + P.3608) < (P.3611 - P.3608)
Low frequency (81f<)
This protection detects the “loss of mains” from a decrease of frequency. It is configured by
the following parameters (menu 3.6.0):
 P.3609: low frequency threshold (percentage of a P.1001), under which mains is

 P.3610: delay related with low frequency threshold.
If the protection is enabled, mains is “fault” if frequency is below the P.3609 threshold
continuously for the P.3610 delay. Mains is “in tolerance” if frequency is above the P.3609 +
P.3608 threshold (hysteresis), except it is detected “fault” by another protection.
High frequency (81f>)
This protection detects the “loss of mains” from an increase of frequency. It is configured by
the following parameters (menu 3.6.0):
 P.3611: high frequency threshold (percentage of a P.1001), over which mains is

 P.3612: delay related with high frequency threshold.
If the protection is enabled, mains is “fault” if frequency is above the P.3611 threshold
continuously for the P.3612 delay. Mains is “in tolerance” if frequency is below the P.3611 -
P.3608 threshold (hysteresis), except it is detected “fault” by another protection.
Frequency variation in a time range (81R or ∆f/∆t or ROCOF).
Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF or 81R or DF/DT) This protection detects the “loss of
mains” from an increase or a decrease of frequency that must last in the time. In other words,
a single change in frequency does not trip this protection; in order to trip it, the increase or
decrease of frequency must stay over the threshold continuously for the configured time. It is
configured by the following parameters (menu 3.6.0):
 P.3613: ∆f/∆t mode. It allows to decide whether to evaluate the frequency increases
or decreases only, or both.
 P.3614: ∆f/∆t threshold. It allows to set a threshold (Hz/s) for the protection.
 P.3615: delay related with ∆f/∆t threshold.
If the protection is enabled, mains is “fault” if MC100 detects a constant increase (or decrease)
of frequency higher than P.3614 threshold, continuously for the P.3615 delay.

Note: in case of mains failure, it is disconnected from the gensets and consequently the voltage
on the JF mains sensor is off. Note: there will not be any frequency variation in a time range
(as the frequency is at zero): it is necessary to enable at least the minimum voltage (27 U<) or
the minimum frequency (81 f<) protections to detect the “mains failure”.
Vector jump (or Vector Shift or Vector Surge).
With this protection, in case of mains failure, the gensets sinusoids has a sudden variation of
the rotor position.
This variation can bring to a longer or shorter sinusoid period with respect to the previous or
following ones. We identify as “positive phase jump” the situation where the “loss of mains”
corresponds to one longer period of generators voltages (so a “negative phase jump”
corresponds to one smaller period, like in the previous example).
This protection is configured by the following parameters (menu 3.6.0):
 P.3616: vector jump mode. Allows enabling positive phase jumps, or negative phase
jumps or both.
 P.3617: vector jump threshold. Allow setting the maximum allowed phase jump in
normal conditions.
If the protection is enabled, mains is “fault” if MC100 detects a “phase jump” (in the configured
direction) higher than the P.3617 threshold.
Note: this protection has no delays because phase jump happens once. For this reason it is
necessary to enable at least the minimum voltage (27) or minimum frequency (81<) protections
to be able to detect the “loss of mains” after generators have been disconnected from mains.
The following table shows the maximum trip time of each protection. The time has been
measured from the “loss of mains” moment to when the configured relays of MC100 opened.
(DOF.0034). The only time to be added is the opening time of the circuit breaker that
disconnects generators from mains (called interface device)
Protection Worst case (s) Typical (s)
27 U< 0,124
59 U< 0,122
81 f< 0,105
81 f> 0,083
81R (∆f/∆t) 0,142
Vector jump 0,055
Note: these times are measured in the worst conditions (for example with changes in voltages
and frequency a little bit out of thresholds). With higher changes in voltages and frequency,
protections trip faster.

The controller carries out some actions connected to the “mains failure” only if some gensets
are in parallel with the mains. So, only if:
 MCB is closed.
 MGCB is closed (if it exists).
 At least one GCB is closed (see 10.4).
The actions connected to the mains failure are immediately enabled when all the previous
conditions are all checked. From the version 1.39, it is possible to add a delay by means
parameter P.3618: the protections are enabled after this delay from when the parallel begins.
The purpose is to mask the electrical noises caused by the closure of the circuit breakers that
can result in the trip of some protections. The default value for this parameter is zero.
The actions connected to the mains failure are immediately disabled when at least one of the
previous conditions is not checked.
When a “loss of mains” situation is detected (from mains sensor or external contact), this
situation is maintained (independently from real mains status) for at least the P.3602 time. This
allows, in all situations, to have commands for circuit breakers not shorter than this time.
In the automatic operating sequence, when the mains is “live” again, the controller uses a
delay time that can be configured with the parameter P.3631. If the mains stays “live” in this
delay, the parallel with the mains is allowed again. In manual mode no delay is managed:
parallel to mains is allowed as soon as mains is present (after P.3602 time).
When MC100 detects the “loss of mains”, generators must be disconnected from mains as
soon as possible. Mains, in fact, could back in any moment, and it probably will not be
synchronized to generators yet. In the plant configuration, two circuit breakers must be
identified:
 The “interface device”: it’s the circuit breaker to be opened as soon as possible in case
of “loss of mains”, to disconnect generators from mains.
 The “safety device”: if the “interface device” will not open in 0.5 seconds from the “loss
of mains”, this circuit breaker will be opened.
The “interface device” choice can be influenced by many factors:
 MCB circuit breaker should be used if generators have to work also for the “emergency
service” (there are local loads to be supplied from generators when mains is absent).
 The MGCB circuit breaker is chosen when there are no local loads.
 As an alternative to MGCB (or when MGCB does not exist), the gensets GCB can be
used as interface.
 The choice can be influenced also by practical problems. For example the best circuit
breaker (for “interface device” actions) could be “not managed” directly by MC100: in
this case, it would be better not to select it as “interface device”.
MC100 allows selecting the “interface device” by its parameter P.3601.
Note: it is possible (even if not suggested) to select as “interface device” a circuit breaker not
managed by MC100 (but its status must be acquired by MC100); in this case MC100 will open
only the “safety device” if the external circuit breaker will not open in 0.5 seconds from the
“loss of mains”.
Note: if you select GCB as “interface device”, it is preferable to hard-wire the “loss of mains”
information to all genset controllers. This information is normally transferred from MC100 to
genset controller via can bus; in this case such communication introduces unnecessary

delays, that it is better to avoid. Moreover, the hard-wiring protects also from communication
malfunctions (broken wires for example).
Note: it also possible to select no circuit breaker as “interface device”. In this case, the fast
disconnection of generators from mains has to be done externally. The controller will continue
detecting the “loss of mains” but only for managing the working sequence: for example, if a
plant is configured to work only in parallel to mains, generators will be in any case
disconnected from the mains (but in this case circuit breakers opening time could be longer).
The controller uses all available circuit breakers as “safety device”. In some situation this may
result in an unnecessary opening/closure of a circuit breaker, but this is an emergency
situation, and controller gives priority to safety.
MCB as interface device
MCB will not be opened in case of “loss of mains”, even if configured as “interface device”,
when:
 The MGCB circuit breaker exists and is opened.
 The MGCB circuit breaker does not exist, but no generators have GCB closed and no
generators are “ready to load”.
MGCB as interface device
MGCB will not be opened in case of “loss of mains”, even if configured as “interface device”,
when:
 MCB circuit breaker is directly managed by MC100 and is actually opened.
GCB as interface device
GCB will not be opened in case of “loss of mains”, even if configured as “interface device”,
when:
 MCB circuit breaker is actually opened.
 MGCB circuit breaker is actually opened.
The controller records the following events if the mains status changes (if enabled with bit 6 in
P.0441):
 EVT.1061: the protection “27 U<” has triggered.
 EVT.1062: the protection “59 U>” has triggered.
 EVT.1063: the protection “81 f<” has triggered.
 EVT.1064: the protection “81 f>” has triggered.
 EVT.1065: the protection “81R ∆f/∆t” has triggered.
 EVT.1066: the protection “Vector jump” has triggered.
Normally only the outputs assigned to circuit breakers commands are used to manage the
“loss of mains” situation. If needed, it is possible to configure one digital output to signal the
“mains failure” conditions: This output must be configured with code DOF.0034 (”Mains live by
mains failure protection”) The output is normally active and becomes “non active” when the
“mains failure” is detected. It stays “non active” for at least the time configured in P.3602, then
it will be active again when the mains will be live.

MC100, for its operating sequences, must know if there are gensets (even if they are not
“managed by MC100”) that have their GCB closed. Usually, MC100 acquires this information
via CAN-BUS PMCB. In case there are gensets that are not connected to CANBUS mains, it
is possible to use a MC100 digital input configured with the function DIF.0065 (“GCB status of
the gensets not connected to PMCB”): if this input is active, the controller considers there is at
least one genset with GCB closed.
MC100 needs to know if there are voltages on the gensets bus in order to enable or not the
synchronization when it has to close a circuit breaker. The following terms are used:
 “Dead” bus: no voltages on generators bus.
 “Live” bus: voltages on generators bus.
MC100 can detect the presence of voltage on the gensets bus through its three-phase sensor
(JE) or through an external sensor.
Note: if there is an external sensor, the internal one is ignored.
Note: if MC100 has to synchronize the gensets with the mains, it is necessary to use
the internal sensor (or an external synchronizer).
The gensets bus status is displayed by means of the led GENERATORS BUS LIVE (see 6.2).
Use a digital input configured with the function DIF.0031 (”No voltage on gensets”): when the
input is active, the parallel bus bars are considered “without voltage”.
The controller uses the parameters to configure the sensor:
 P.1001: nominal frequency (Hz).
 P.1101: it indicates if the gensets bus is three-phase (3) or single-phase (1).
 P.1102: gensets nominal voltage. Its value must be the nominal phase-to-phase
voltage for three-phase systems and phase–to–neutral voltage for single-phase
systems.
 P.1103: primary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JE

connector.
 P.1104: secondary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JE

connector.
For the connection of the voltage lines, see paragraph 5.4.
Note: Set the nominal voltage to a value different from zero.
The controller uses a fixed threshold, 9% of nominal voltage (with a 2% hysteresis).

Generators bus is considered “dead” if all voltages (P.1101) are below the 9% threshold, it is
“live” if at least one voltage is above 11% (9 + 2). With default parameters, generators bus is
“dead” if all voltages are lower than 36 V; it is “live” if at least one voltage is greater than 44 V.
The following functions for the configuration of the digital outputs are connected to the gensets
bus bar voltage:

 DOF.0035 (”Voltage on gensets”): the output is active when there is voltage on the
gensets bus bar.
MC100 needs to know if there are voltages on loads bus in order to enable or not the
synchronization when it has to close the circuit breakers. The following terms are used:
 “Dead” bus: no voltages on loads bus.
 “Live” bus: voltages on loads bus.
MC100 is not able to directly detect voltages on the loads (except when MGCB is not used or
always closed). Usually, it recreates this status according to the voltage detected and to the
circuit breakers status.
If preferred (and for safety reasons also), it is possible to use one digital input configured with
the function DIF.0030 (”No voltage on loads”) to acquire this information. Loads bus is “live” if
this input is “not active” (logical state).
The loads status is displayed by means of the signal led LOAD/BUS LIVE (see 6.2).
The following functions for the configuration of the digital outputs are connected to loads
voltage:
 DOF.0036 (”Voltage on loads”): the output is active when there is voltage on the loads.
Synchronization is used when a circuit breaker has to be closed and there are voltages on
both sides of it. Synchronization can be divided into two separate functions:
 Check for differences in phase, frequency, voltages and phase sequence between
generators and mains, in order to allow a safe closure of the circuit breaker.
 Voltages and frequency regulations, in order to minimize differences in voltages,

frequency and phase.
MC100 can handle both functions, but, if needed, allows one or both to be managed externally.
Before closing a circuit breaker, this function checks the differences in voltages, frequency,
phase and cycling sense between the mains and the gensets bus bars are within the
thresholds configured; if yes, the circuit breaker can be closed in safety, otherwise it cannot
be closed.
MC100 performs these checks if:
 It directly manages frequency and phase regulations (see 10.7.1.1).
 Frequency and phase regulations are managed externally, but the parameter P.3310
forces MC100 to manage the synchro-check.
In these cases, the circuit breaker closure command (MCB o MGCB) is issued only when the
“synchronized” status is detected.
MC100 does not perform these checks if frequency and phase regulations are managed
externally, and parameter P.3310 configures MC100 not to manage the synchro-check. In this
case, the circuit breaker closing command is immediately issued, as MC100 supposes that an
external synchro-check inhibits the physical closing of the circuit breaker if not synchronized.

Obviously, synchronization will never start if one or both side of the circuit breaker are “dead”
(without voltages).
Parameter P.3310 allows forcing the use of the MC100 synchro-check with externally
managed frequency and phase regulations (its value is ignored if MC100 manages regulation
processes). It allows to force the MC100 synchro-check of the circuit breakers (MCB or MGCB)
individually or together (if preferred). By default, MC100 synchro-check is always forced by the
parameter P.3310.
MC100 performs six different checks before allowing the circuit breaker closure: only when all
checks are correct, the circuit breaker will be closed.
Voltages in tolerance check
Voltages (both mains and generators ones) must be inside configured thresholds. For
example, if we have 200 V on both mains and generators, but nominal voltages are 400 V, the
circuit breaker will not be closed, even if voltage difference is zero. This check can be
configured with:
 P.3306: minimum voltages threshold (%).
 P.3307: maximum voltages threshold (%).
These thresholds are displayed in percentage. These thresholds are percentage of P.1202 for
mains voltages, and of P.1102 for genset voltages).
Each voltage measure (see P.1101 e P.1201) is compared with these thresholds: if at least
one of them is out of thresholds, the circuit breaker cannot be closed (this situation is shown
on display page B.02 by an empty rectangle – see 6.3.4.2).
Voltage differences check
If all voltages are inside the configured thresholds, MC100 calculates the differences between
generators and mains voltages (L1 of generators – L1 of mains and so on) and converts them
as per the percentage of generator voltages (P.3301). This parameter allows to set a maximum
percentage difference.
MC100 analyses the differences between the voltages measured (mains phase L1 - genset
phase L1, etc.) and it displays them in percentage with respect to the gensets voltage. The
circuit breaker can be closed only if all differences (%) are below the threshold configured by
parameter P.3301 (with a fixed hysteresis of 1%). If at least one difference is higher than the
threshold, the closing is not allowed. Obviously, in a single-phase system, the controller will
consider the existing one only.
Starting from version 1.34, MC100 is able to work also with different nominal voltages between
mains and generators (this happens when a transformer is placed between them). In this
situation, both voltages (mains and generators) are converted into percentages of their own
nominal, and MC100 makes the comparison between those percentages: if the mains voltages
are 95% of their nominal, also the generators voltages should be 95% of their nominal.
The result of this check (and of the one described above) is displayed in page B.02 by the
rectangle that indicates the voltage difference (see 6.3.4.2):
 Empty rectangle: voltages or voltage differences are out of thresholds.
 Full rectangle: voltages and voltage differences are inside thresholds.
Frequency in tolerance check
Frequencies (both mains and generators ones) must be inside configured thresholds. For
example, if we have 40 Hz on both mains and generators, but nominal frequencies are 50 Hz,
the circuit breaker will not be closed, even if frequency difference is zero. This check can be
configured with:
 P.3308: minimum frequency threshold (%).

 P.3309: maximum frequency threshold (%).
These thresholds are percentage of P.1001.
Mains and generators frequency are compared with these thresholds: if at least one of them
is out of thresholds, the circuit breaker cannot be closed (this situation is shown on display
page B.02 by an empty rectangle – see 6.3.4.2).
Frequency difference check
If all frequencies are in tolerance, MC100 calculates the frequency differences between
phases and it allows the closing only if lower than the threshold configured with the parameter
P.3303. This parameter allows to set a max difference in Hz.
MC100 analyses the differences between the frequencies measured, and it compares them
with the threshold P.3303 (with a fixed 0,1Hz hysteresis): if the difference is higher than the
threshold, the closing is not allowed.
The frequency status (the results of this check and of the previous one) is shown on the display
page B.02, by the second small rectangle from the left (the one identified by the “Hz” label,
see 6.3.4.2):
 Empty rectangle: frequencies or frequency differences are out of thresholds.
 Full rectangle: frequencies and frequency differences are inside thresholds.
Phase difference check
MC100 must evaluate the phase difference between mains and generators, and allow closing
the circuit breaker only when this difference is below the threshold configured by parameter
P.3302 (with a fixed hysteresis of 1 degree). P.3302 allows setting the maximum phase
difference in degrees
The results of this check is shown on the display page B.02, by the third small rectangle from
the left (the one identified by the “°” label, see 6.3.4.2):
 Empty rectangle: phase difference is out of thresholds.
 Full rectangle: phase difference is inside thresholds.
Sometimes, the plants do not use transformers. These transformers can introduce a phase
error in voltages. So it is possible that synchronizing on their primary side, we have a phase
error on the secondary side. Normally, circuit breaker is on the primary side of the
transformers, while MC100 is connected on the secondary side. If MC100 regulates for 0° on
secondary side, voltages on the circuit breaker may be not synchronized. Parameter P.3305
allows setting a fixed phase offset. If different from zero, MC100 regulates for x° on the
secondary side, in order to have 0° on primary side. The parameter P.3305 allows to set (with
a sign) the compensation of the transformers phase error (+/-180°).
Phases sequence check
Only for three-phase plants, MC100 check for the same phases sequence on generators and
mains. The circuit breaker can be closed only if the same phases sequence is detected. No
parameters are provided for this check.
The results of this check is shown on the display page B.02, by the forth small rectangle from
the left (the one identified by two arrows, see 6.3.4.2):
 Empty rectangle: different phase sequences.
 Full rectangle: same phase sequences.
Circuit breaker closing enabled

MC100 detects a “synchronized” status only when all previous checks (or all the ones
applicable) give correct results, consecutively for the time configured by parameter P.3304.
When MC100 removes its consent, it does not reactive it for at least one second.
Once closure has been enabled, this condition lasts for at least 0.4 seconds, even if the
“synchronized” status is no more present (see 6.3.4.2).
 In the same way, when MC100 disables the closure, it can’t be enable again for at
least one second.
 The “closure enable” condition is shown on the display page B.02, by the fifth small
rectangle from the left (the one identified by two arrows, see ):
Empty rectangle: closure not allowed. Full rectangle: closure allowed. Note: circuit breaker
closure is enabled only when MC100 first detects a “not synchronized” status and then a
“synchronized status”. This protects the plants from wiring errors. If MC100 directly manages
frequency and phase regulations, it automatically forces generators to go in a “not
synchronized” status first, and then in a “synchronized” status.
It’s possible to configure an output to signal the synchronism condition externally. This output
will be activated during synchronization only, when MC100 activates the internal “closure
enable” status. The output is configured with the function DOF.0032 (”Synchronized”).
To synchronize generators with mains, it is needed to work on:
 On generator voltages, to make them equal to mains: this avoids current circulation
(reactive) when the circuit breaker will be closed. Normally, the gensets voltages
should be a little bit higher than mains voltages, in order to supply (little) reactive power
from gensets while closing.
 On generators frequency, to minimize differences on phase and frequency from

mains.
MC100 can manage both voltage and frequency regulations on generators, by the can bus
link. Thus, it is able to minimize differences in voltages, frequency and phase between mains
and generators, to allow a safe closure of the circuit breaker.
Note: the gensets controllers always accept these commands, even if they are “not
managed by MC100”.
Note: these commands are transmitted on CANBUS only during the synchronization.
It is not mandatory using MC100 for this function: if preferred (or if it is needed because, for
example, mains voltages are not acquired by MC100), an external analogue synchronizer can
be used (GAC or other).
Analogue synchronizers act on generator frequency by a command signal. It is possible to

connect this signal directly to an analogue input of all genset controllers. Alternatively
(suggested option), it is possible to connect this signal to a MC100 analogue input that will
transfer it via CANBUS to the genset controllers.
Each synchronizer has its own signal type. MC100 is able to interact only with signals in direct
voltages 0-10 Vdc. Some synchronizers have different command signals:
 Current signals (4-20 mA, +/-10 mA). It is simple to convert these signals in Volts DC
applying a resistor on them.
 PWM. Not managed by MC100.

 Up/Down. These synchronizers use two digital outputs to request an increase or a
decrease of speed. They cannot be used directly with MC100: it is necessary to have
a DIPOT module that transforms the UP/DOWN commands in an analogue signal 0-
10 Vdc.
Within the 0-10 Vdc range, MC100 is fully configurable: for example, MC100 can acquire a 3
to 6 Vdc signal and convert it to -4 to +4 Hz change on gensets. MC100 can be also configured
to decrease generators frequency when the synchronizer signal increases (and vice-versa).
In order to use an external synchronizer, an analogue input of MC100 must be correctly

configured. For example, let’s suppose to use a GAC synchronizer and connect it to the
analogue input 1 (see paragraph [1] for parameters related to analogue inputs):
 P.1841 - “Analogue input 1 function”. This parameter allows selecting the analogue
input function. For external synchronizers, three functions are available:
o AIF.0010: if the external synchronizer has to be used for the MCB closing only
(MGCB synchronization is managed by MC100).
o AIF.0011: if the external synchronizer has to be used for MGCB closing only
(MCB synchronization is managed by MC100).
o AIF.0012: if the external synchronizer has to be used for the closing of both
MCB and MGCB circuit breakers.
 P.1842 - “Analogue input 1 minimum value”. GAC synchronizer works between 0 and
10 V, so this parameter must be set to 0%.
 P.1843 - “Analogue input 1 maximum value”. GAC synchronizer works between 0 and
10 V, so this parameter must be set to 100%.
In this way, we configure the input. Now, we have to configure the conversion of the
measurement from Vdc to Hz. The speed regulation command over CAN-BUS is a percentage
value: 0% corresponds to 4 Hz less then nominal frequency, 100% corresponds to 4 Hz over
nominal frequency (so 50% corresponds to nominal frequency). So, actually it is necessary to
convert the signal 0-10 Vdc in a percentage value. GAC synchronizer decreases its command
signal to speed-up generators. So:
 P.3315 - “Synchronization reference at minimum input voltage”. Setting this parameter

to 100 %, there will be an increase of the gensets frequency by 4 Hz when the GAC
command signal is at 0 Vdc (that is when it requires the maximum speed).
 P.3316 - “Synchronization reference at maximum input voltage”. Setting this

parameter to 100 %, there will be an decrease of the gensets frequency by 4 Hz when
the GAC command signal is at 10 Vdc (that is when it requires the minimum speed).
In the previous example, the GAC synchronizer is able to change generators frequency of +/-
4 Hz. With P.3315 = 75% e P.3316 = 25%, the maximum change of frequency should be +/-
2 Hz. By setting the two parameters in an asymmetric way, it is possible to compensate
electrical offsets (GAC should give a 5 Vdc signal to request the nominal frequency, it may be
5.1 or 4.9).
During the synchronization phase, the controller will vary the gensets frequency as required
by the external synchronizer.
Note: at the moment, there is no support for the genset voltage regulation by an external
synchronizer. This function, if it is enabled, is always managed by MC100.
Note: it is possible to use two different external synchronizers for MCB and MGCB, by wiring
them to two different analogue inputs configured with codes “11” and “12”. For each input is
possible to set-up minimum and maximum voltages, but parameters used to convert voltages
to % are common to both inputs, so external synchronizers must be of the same type.

Phase/Frequency regulation
MC100 regulates the gensets frequency in order to equalize the two frequencies and reset the
phase difference between gensets and mains.
A PI regulator is used to manage the frequency and reset the phase error (see 10.7.2.2.1). It
works on phase difference, and can be configured with the following parameters:
 P.3311 - “Gain for phase control loop”.
 P.3312 - “Integrative factor for phase control loop”.
These parameters have to be adapted to get the best response from the system. They have
the same functions of trimmers on analogue synchronizers.
Note: when you are setting these parameters, be sure the circuit breaker cannot be closed.
Do that by opening fuses (if available) or by setting parameter P.3302 to zero.
Voltage regulation
The same concepts explained in the previous paragraph are valid also for voltage regulation.
Parameters provided for the voltage PI regulator are:
 P.3313 - “Voltage matching gain”.
 P.3314 - “Voltage matching integrative factor”.
If both parameters are “0”, no voltage regulation is available during synchronization.
The controller uses two PI regulators internally in order to regulate the voltage and the speed
of the gensets for the synchronization operations. All internal PI regulators can be configured
with two parameters:
 The factor proportional to the current error (P) is also called “earning”.
 The factor related to the integral in the error delay (I) is also called “supplementary
factor”.
In the previous parameter there are the parameters associated to each PI regulator.
These two parameters for each PI regulator has to be “adjusted” during the installation
procedure. In fact, they depend on different factors: the type of engines, the alternator powers,
the type of alternators; different parameters could be necessary for similar systems.
The definition of these parameters is not particularly critical if carried out with method.
Unfortunately, the empirical adjustment (called Ziegler-Nichols) requires to measure the
oscillation period of the measurement (frequency, voltage), which is not always possible (or
simple) to do.
For this reason, besides the empirical method, we suggest a simplified method that should
help carrying out in a valid way the parameters choice.
The PI regulator parameters can be modified even if the plant is working, by the user panel. It
is suggested to carry out the modifications by using the BoardPrg3 program, which is available
for free on our SICES website.
1) Set “P” at an initial value (0,100) and “I” at 0,000.
2) Increase “P” until the adjusted measurement start to oscillate (for example, if you are
adjusting the PI that manages the engines speed during the synchronization, increase

“P” until it seems to hear that the engines accelerate / slow down. Decrease/increase
the value “P” until an oscillation point is determined (a good estimate is sufficient).
3) Measure the oscillation period (the time between two consecutive peaks of speed).
4) Set “P” at a slight lower value than the one resulted by the division of the current value
by 2.2.
5) Set “I” at the value calculated by dividing 1.2 for the period of oscillation measured
before (in seconds). A lower value can be set at a lower value, decreasing its
performance but increasing the stability range.
6) Further adjustments could be necessary. Check how the system reacts in case of low,
medium or high load. In case there still is a system instability, reduce the “P” value
again.
To avoid the problem of measuring the oscillation period, you can proceed by referring to what
has been described before, up to the point 6 included, except for the point 3 and 5. At point 5,
increase/decrease “I” (after having adjusted “P” at point 4) until getting the best performances.
The parameter “P” is not able to guarantee a good adjustment alone: To reduce the error, “P”
should be increased, but over a set threshold, the systems becomes unstable. The value “P”
defined with the described method usually is the best relation between stability and
performance.
For a good adjustment, it is necessary to set the factor “I”. Also little values of the parameter
“I” change the the system performance. The value, obtained by the procedure described,
usually supplies the best performances. Anyhow, it is not critical and it can be set in a greater
range of values.
Consider that the factor “I” store the adjustment errors: delay in the recovery of the error can
cause over-shoots or under-shoots. Very high values of “I” bring to the oscillation of the
system.
Once you found the value that supplies a good performance, try to decrease it until the
performance decreases under the waited minimum. Then select an intermediate value in this
range.
In some case, it would be necessary to start a procedure with a minimum value of “I” in order
to guarantee a level of adjustment suitable with the operation of the system (for example, avoid
the energy inversion). A very low value of “I” (0.01) can be used with light effects on the
procedure.
MC100 allows configuring digital inputs with two special functions related to synchronization:
 DIF.0013 (”MCB synchronization required”)
 DIF.0023 (”MGCB synchronization required”)
These inputs must be used when the related circuit breaker is not managed by MC100, but
you want to use PI regulators of MC100 for synchronization. When the input is “active” (logical
state), if all necessary conditions for synchronization are present, MC100 starts the
synchronization process and signals it to external devices using up to three digital outputs (see
next paragraph).
MC100 allows configuring digital outputs with three special functions related to
synchronization:

 DOF.0030 (“Synchronization on MCB”) It is used when MCB is managed by MC100
but an external synchronizer has to be used. When MC100 starts synchronization
process, this output become “active” and can be used to supply/enable the external
synchronizer. When synchronization ends, the output become “not active”.
 DOF.0031 (“Synchronization on MGCB”) It is used when MGCB is managed by

MC100 but an external synchronizer has to be used. When MC100 starts
synchronization process, this output become “active” and can be used to
supply/enable the external synchronizer. When synchronization ends, the output
become “not active”.
 DOF.0032 (“Synchronized”). This output can be used in case the synchro-check of

the controller is used for a circuit breaker closing (MCB or MGCB), which is
commanded by an external logic. This output can be “active” only during
synchronization process, when MC100 detects the “synchronized” status between
mains and generators. Outside synchronization process, or when generators are not
synchronized with mains, this output is “not active”. This output should be wired to the
external logic that physically closes the circuit breaker (be aware that the output
become “not active” after circuit breaker has been closed).
This description refers to the operation in AUTO, TEST and REMOTE START. It also refers
to the operation in MAN if the parameter P.3317 (”automatic synchronization in manual mode”)
is set to “1”.
If the “synchronized” status persists for 10 seconds and the circuit breaker doesn’t close,
MC100 changes generators frequency to force a “not synchronized” status, then starts to
synchronize again. This avoids problems when using external synchro-checks in addition to
the MC100 one: it is possible that some external synchro-checks don’t allow the closure
because they haven’t detected any “unsynchronized” status before.
MC100 allows configuring the maximum duration of synchronizations for the two circuit
breakers:
 P.3806: MGCB synchronization maximum time.
 P.3809: MCB synchronization maximum time.
The duration of the synchronization phase on a circuit breaker is managed only in automatic
mode (not MAN) and if the related delay is different from zero; in this case an anomaly is
activated:
 W272 - MCB synchronization failure. It is always a warning. The controller can decide
to close MCB without synchronization (opening MGCB or GCB), depending on the
type of plant and on the configuration (P.3815).
 X271 - MGCB synchronization failure. If MGCB is directly managed from MC100, it is

an alarm, otherwise it is a warning.
This description refers to the operation in MAN if the parameter P.3317 (”automatic
synchronization in manual mode”) is set to “0”.
The user has to manually regulate the gensets voltage and frequency until the “synchronized”
status is detected (this check is always carried out by MC100).
MC100 provides two parameters that allow voltages and frequency regulations on the
generators:
 P.3101 - “Voltage reference”.
 P.3201 - “Speed reference”.

Both are expressed as percentage (between 0 and 100%). The first allows changing
generators voltages of +/-15 Volt; the second allows changing generators frequency of +/- 4
Hz (the real voltages and frequency ranges depend on single genset controller settings).
Setting both to 50%, generators work to their nominal voltages and frequency.
These parameters can be directly changed on display page B.02 (provided for
synchronization). It is possible to simplify the procedure using two potentiometers instead of
the parameters. The following is needed:
Voltage
 Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.0021 (“Voltage reference”)

(parameter P.1841 for analogue input 1).
 Configure the minimum and maximum voltage acquired by the input from the
potentiometer (parameters P.1842 e P.1843 for analogue input 1). Normally 0% e
100% are used.
 Configure the generators voltages corresponding to minimum and maximum voltage

acquired by the input:
o P.3102 – “Voltage reference at minimum input voltage”. Normally 0% is used.
o P.3103 – “Voltage reference at maximum input voltage”. Normally 100% is

used.
After these configurations, you can change the voltage reference between 0 and 100% by
moving the potentiometer between 0 and 10 Vdc (the current voltage reference is shown
on page B.02), and consequently you are able to change the gensets voltage. Note: once
you have configured an analogue input with the function AIF.0021, the parameter P.3101
is no more used.
Frequency.
 Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.0020 (“Speed reference”)

 Configure the minimum and maximum voltage acquired by the input from the
potentiometer (parameters P.1842 e P.1843 for analogue input 1). Normally 0% e
100% are used.
 Configure the generators frequency corresponding to minimum and maximum voltage

o P.3202 – “Speed reference at minimum input voltage”. Normally 0% is used.
o P.3203 – “Speed reference at maximum input voltage”. Normally 100% is

used.
After these configurations, you can change the speed reference between 0 and 100% by
moving the potentiometer between 0 and 10 Vdc (the current speed reference is shown
on page B.02), and consequently you are able to change the gensets frequency. Note:
once you have configured an analogue input with the function AIF.0020, the parameter
P.3201 is no more used.
Manual synchronization procedure is:
 Start the gensets (by pressing the START button on the panel, all gensets “managed
by MC100” are started).
 Select the page B.02 on the display (this can be carried out also by a manual closing
command of the circuit breaker – MCB/MGCB pushbutton or digital inputs configured
for MCB/MGCB).

 Use parameters P.3101 and P.3201 (or the related potentiometer, if configured) to
synchronize the gensets to the mains. When MC100 signals a synchronism status,
send a new closing command (pushbutton or related digital input): the circuit breaker
will be closed.
Parameter P.3815 configures the actions of the controller in case of failure of the
synchronization for the MCB circuit breaker closing.
 “0 – No blackout”. By setting this value, you configure the controller to avoid any
blackout on the loads (automatically). After having enabled the warning of MCB
synchronization failure (W272), the controller keeps the loads connected to the
gensets. When the operator will acknowledge the warning, MC100 will try again to
close MCB through the synchronization.
 “1 – Short blackout”. By setting this value, you allow a short blackout on the loads
when the mains is back. Basically, after having enabled the warning of MCB
synchronization failure (W272), the controller opens the MGCB circuit breaker (or it
forces the opening of the GCB circuit breakers) in order to be able to close MCB
without synchronization. Once MCB is closed, if the gensets intervention is still
required, MC100 will try to close MGCB with synchronization (or it will allow again the
GCB closing - with synchronization).
In many applications it is useful to know how many kW are circulating over the connection
between the plant and the mains. In case of emergency power plants, for example, you can
monitor the loads consumption even when they are connected to the mains and not to gensets.
For parallel to mains applications, it is useful to control power supplied by generator in order
to import/export a fixed quantity from mains, independently from current loads.
The following rules are used:
 Positive active power: the power is imported from the mains.
 Negative active power: the power is exported from the mains.
MC100 has two direct methods to acquire this measure, plus another indirect one.
The best method is to allow MC100 direct measuring the currents (and so the powers) on the
mains. The following is needed:
 Connect the CTs of the mains line to MC100, and connect the mains voltages too.
 Indicate MC100 that the current transformers are connected to the mains (P.1301=1).
 Check that the CTs ratio (P.1302) and the possible VTs ratio (P.1203 and P.1204) are
correct, besides the number of phases (P.1201), the nominal voltage (P.1202) and the
nominal frequency (P.1001).
Now MC100 continuously measures the powers on mains.
It is possible to connect an external instrument to an analogue input of MC100, in order to

acquire a signal proportional to the active power on mains. The following is needed:
 Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.0040 (”Power on the

interconnection with the mains”) (parameter P.1841 for analogue input 1).

 Configure the minimum and maximum voltage acquired by the input (parameters
P.1842 e P.1843 for analogue input 1). Normally 0% e 100% are used.
 Configure the powers on mains related to minimum and maximum voltage acquired
by the input:
o P.3534 – “Power on mains related to minimum input voltage”.
o P.3535 – “Power on mains related to maximum input voltage”.
These parameters represent powers (kW) and can be set up to +/- 30 MW. Powers on
mains is signed information (positive if imported): one of these parameters should be
negative.
For example, if the external instrument has a 0-5 Vdc signal, which corresponds to -
1000...+1000 kW, the parameters have to be set as follows:
 P.1841 = 40.
 P.1842 = 0.0%.
 P.1843 = 50.0%.
 P.3534 = -1000.
 P.3535 = +1000.
Note: once you have configured an analogue input with the function AIF.0040, the mains active
power measurement is acquired from it, even if MC100 is able to measure it directly.
If the previous methods cannot be used, MC100 can calculate the power on mains subtracting
the loads from the power supplied by generators (with sign). MC100 needs to know both loads
and generators powers. The only way is to place the CTs connected to MC100 on the loads
(P.1301 = 2). In this way MC100 directly measures powers on loads, while generators powers
are calculated by summing (with sign) the power of each generators, as received by can bus
link.
MC100 does not implement any regulations on active power. No PI regulators are provided
for reactive power: MC100 select the power setpoint for generators, and the power regulation
task is performed by each generator control device.
MC100 is able to select the active power setpoint for generators through the can bus link. This
setpoint is used by the generator control devices only when generators are in parallel with
mains. When they are in “island mode”, generator control devices automatically manage load
sharing (without MC100) between available generators, as a percentage of their nominal
power.
MC100 sends the active power setpoint through the can bus as a percentage. This setpoint is
the same for all generators: each generator control device will convert this percentage to kW,
multiplying it by its nominal power; then it will provide active power control loop to move
generator power to the setpoint.
On MC100, operator selects the setpoint directly as kW, not as percentage. MC100 converts
from kW to %, using available generators and their nominal powers.
Let’s see a practical example: suppose to have three generators (200 kW, 300 kW and 700
kW). Suppose also that actual power setpoint is 900 kW.
 MC100 calculates the total nominal power of available generators (200 + 300 + 700 =
1200 kW).

 Then converts the power setpoint as a percentage of the total nominal power (900 /
1200 = 75 %).
 This value is transmitted on the CANBUS.
 Genset 1 receives the setpoint (%) and converts it to kW by multiplying it by its nominal
power (0.75 * 200 kW = 150 kW).
 Genset 2 receives the setpoint (%) and converts it to kW by multiplying by it by its

nominal power (0.75 * 300 kW = 225 kW).
power (0.75 * 700 kW = 525 kW).
As you can see, the total power required from generators will be 150 + 225 + 525 = 900 kW,
the same value set by operator on MC100. At the same time, all generators are supplying 75%
of their nominal power, so are all used in the same way.
Note: the operator can select a setpoint greater than the total genset nominal power (in the
previous example, this happens if the 750kW genset is blocked). To avoid problems, the power
percentage setpoint is limited to 100%: if there are not enough gensets, the power setpoint set
won’t be reached.
Important note: Only the controllers “managed by MC100” use the power setpoint transmitted
by MC100. The controllers “not managed” by MC100 use the proper local setpoint. MC100
considers this info when calculating the percentage power setpoint transmitted to the
controllers.
Let’s make another example to clarify that: imagine to have always three gensets 200kW,
300kW and 700kW. The 300kW genset is “not managed by MC100” and, locally, it is set to a
50kW power setpoint. It will always produce 50kW. Let’s suppose that the current power
setpoint on MC100 is 900 kW.
 MC100 calculates the total nominal power of the gensets “managed by MC100” (in
this case 200 + 700 = 900 kW).
 MC100 calculates the power setpoint that will have to share the “managed” gensets.
You only need to deduct the MC100 setpoint (900 kW), the power currently supplied
by the “not managed” gensets. In this case: 900 kW – 50 kW = 850 kW.
 Then converts the power setpoint as a percentage of the total nominal power (850 /
900 = 94.44 %).
 This value is transmitted on the CANBUS.
power (0.9444 * 200 kW = 188.88 kW).
power (0.9444 * 700 kW = 661.11 kW).
As you can see, the total power required from generators will be 188.88 + 50 + 661.11 = 900
kW, the same value set by operator on MC100. At the same time, all the “managed” gensets
are supplying 94.44% of their power, so they are all used equally.
If the operator increases the setpoint of genset 2 (not managed) to 200 kW, MC100 will require
77.77% from gensets 1 and 3: the total will always be 900 kW (155.55 + 200 + 544.44).
Important note: if a plant is composed by more MC100, the system allows the parallel with
the mains only on one of them. If the circuit breakers would be all managed externally, there
could be more MC100 managing the parallel with the mains: in this case, the power setpoint
used by the gensets is the one transmitted from the MC100 controller with minor PMCB
address.

Note: genset control devices have their own parameter to select the operating mode while in
parallel with mains. Important note: whatever is the mode selected on MC100, it corresponds
to a power setpoint for the genset controllers, which will always be in “BASE LOAD” mode.
This term is used to indicate the working mode where the power setpoint for generators is
selected by the operator and it is not influenced by the local loads.
To select this mode, set parameter P.3006 to “1”.
In this mode, the operator selects the power setpoint for the plant using parameter P.3523,
directly as kW. Values up to 30 MW can be selected. The parameter can be modified also in
MAN o AUTO modes, and directly from display pages M.01 and B.01.
Alternatively, it is possible to use a controller analogue input to configure the setpoint. This
input can be connected to a potentiometer, or any external device that has to adjust the power
setpoint of the plant.
To use the analogue input, do the following:
 Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.0030 (”Power reference”)

 Configure the set points related to minimum and maximum voltage acquired by the
input:
o P.3521 – “Power related to minimum input voltage for BASE LOAD”. Typically
0 kW is used.
o P.3522 – “Power related to maximum input voltage for BASE LOAD”. Set here
the maximum setpoint you need.
After this configuration, by moving the potentiometer between 0 and 10 Vdc the power setpoint
varies in the limits set (the setpoint is displayed on pages M.01 and B.01). Note: once you
have configured an analogue input with the function 30, the parameter P.3523 is no
more used.
Finally, it is possible to use both the parameter P.3523 and an analogue input, by using a
digital input to select which one of them has to be used in a certain moment. Configure a digital
input with the function DIF.0064 (”kW reference for BASELOAD by analogue input”):
 If this input exists and it is active, the power setpoint for the parallel with the mains is
acquired by an analogue input properly configured.
 If this input exists and it is not active, the setpoint is the parameter P.3523.
 If this input does not exist, consider what described at the beginning of the paragraph.
This term indicates the working mode in which the power setpoint configured by the operator
is referred to the interconnection point with the mains and not the gensets: the setpoint for the
gensets is calculated from the selected setpoint and the current power on mains. It is
mandatory that MC100 is able to measure the power on mains (see 10.8).
To select this mode, set parameter P.3006 to “2”.
Otherwise you can set the parameter P.3006 to “1” (“BASE LOAD”) and use a digital input to
switch the working mode between “BASE LOAD” and “IMPORT/EXPORT”. The input must be
configured with the function DIF.0057 (”import/export”): when the input is “active” (logical

status) the working mode is “IMPORT/EXPORT”, when it is “not active” the working mode is
“BASE LOAD”.
Operator can select power setpoint on mains by using parameter P.3533, directly as kW. It
allows setting values up to +/-30 MW. A positive value means that the plant should import
power from mains, while a negative value indicates that power should be exported to mains.
A setpoint equal to zero selects no power transfers over mains: generators should supply only
local loads. The parameter can be modified also in MAN o AUTO modes, and directly from
display pages M.01 and B.01.
Alternatively, it is possible to use a controller analogue input to acquire the setpoint. This input
can be connected to a potentiometer, or any external device that has to adjust the power
setpoint of the plant. To use the analogue input, do the following:
 Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.0032 (”Reference for import/export”)
 Configure the power set points for mains related to minimum and maximum voltage
o P.3531 – “Power reference for "IMPORT/EXPORT" related to minimum input

voltage”.
o P.3532 – “Power reference for "IMPORT/EXPORT" related to maximum input

voltage”.
One of these parameters must be negative if power export to mains must be available. One of
these parameters must be positive if import from mains must be available.
After that, the power setpoint on mains can be changed using the potentiometer (the setpoint
is shown on pages M.01 e B.01). Note: once you have configured an analogue input with
the function AIF.0032, the parameter P.3533 is no more used.
The power setpoint for the gensets depends on the loads connected. So, it may happen that
the few loads on the gensets have to supply a very low power. In this case, the engines do not
work well and if the situation does not change for a long time, they can get damaged. With the
parameter P.3536, it is possible to configure a minimum value of power that MC100 has to
require from gensets when they are in parallel with the mains in IMPORT/EXPORT mode.
This term indicates a temporary mode that consists in configuring the power currently
consumed by the loads as power setpoint for the gensets. Once the gensets reach the setpoint
(so the mains is no more supplying the loads), the controller opens the mains circuit breaker
(MCB) and the loads are supplied by the gensets.
To select this mode, set parameter P.3006 to “3”. Otherwise you can set this parameter to “1”
(“BASE LOAD”) or “2” (“IMPORT/EXPORT”) and use a digital input to switch the working mode
to “Transfer to generators”. This input must be configured with the function DIF.0058 “Transfer
to gensets”: when the input is “active” (logical status) the working mode is “Transfer to
generators”, when it is “not active” the working mode is the previous one.
This working mode is different if MC100 acquires the power on mains or not (see 10.8): MC100
acquires the power on mains.
 Power setpoint for generators is calculated as in “IMPORT/EXPORT” mode, assuming

0 kW setpoint on mains. When generators reach the setpoint no power is flowing on
the mains: the MCB circuit breaker can be opened without load transients on
generators.

 If MC100 does not acquire the power on mains, the operator must set the power value
required by the loads with the parameter P.3523 (or use the related analogue input,
see 10.9.1). This setpoint will be transmitted to the gensets. Once generators reach
this setpoint MCB circuit breaker will be opened: if setpoint is near actual loads, no
load transients will happen on generators.
Note: if generators are not able to reach the setpoint (because too loads are applied) MCB
circuit breaker will never be opened.
This temporary phase ends when the gensets reach the setpoint or after the configured
maximum delay (unless the gensets cannot supply the power required): the duration of the
unload ramp (P.3812) is considered as maximum delay for this management (anyhow, MCB
is open only if the gensets are able to take the load). Starting from the version 1.39, it is
possible to add a delay by means parameter P.3820: the controller opens MCB only when the
power supplied by the generators reached the setpoint continuously for this delay. The default
value for this parameter is zero.
MC100 does not manage directly the load ramps, but this function is managed by the gensets
controllers.
When the gensets are supplying in parallel with the mains and the MGCB circuit breaker has
to be opened, MC100 commands the unloading process to gensets (if no alarms are
activated).
The command consists in setting a power reference to the gensets. This reference is
calculated in different ways for the two following conditions:
 There is another MC100 with MGCB closed. In this case, the gensets are supplying
the loads of more than one MC100 simultaneously. So, MC100 cannot bring the
gensets power to zero, because it would connect the loads of all MC100 with MGCB
closed to only one mains transformer, which could be overcharged. MC100 can
proceed in two ways:
o MC100 measures the power that goes through its own MGCB. This function
is available from the version 1.28 of the controller (see 5.6). In this case,
MC100 calculates the power setpoint for the gensets to bring to zero the
power that goes through the MGCB. When the power is close to zero, MC100
opens the MGCB, avoiding load transfers on both gensets and mains
transformers.
o MC100 does not measures the power that goes through its own MGCB. In
this case, MC100 simply opens its own MGCB: anyhow, this leads to a load
transfer on both gensets and mains transformers.
 There are no other MC100 with MGCB closed. In this case, MC100 imposes to
gensets an active power reference equal to 0%. When the gensets power is close to
zero, MC100 opens the MGCB, avoiding load transfers on both gensets and mains
transformers.
Then the generator control devices manage by itself the unload ramp for their generators.
MC100 waits for the end of the unloading process and then opens the MCB circuit breaker.
The unloading process is terminated when:
 In case there are other MC100 with MGCB closed, this MC100 does not measure the
power on the MGCB circuit breaker. In this case, the unload ramp is not carried out.
 In case there are no gensets with GCB closed (see 10.4), the controller stops the
unload ramp.
 If the parallel with the mains is not allowed: the unload ramp can last maximum 0.5
seconds.

 If you have configured a maximum duration for the parallel with the mains (parameter
P.03816): the unload ramp is immediately stopped after the gensets are in parallel as
per the time configured.
 If the gensets power supplied by the gensets “managed by MC100” (%) is lower than
the threshold set in P.3811 (the power (%) is calculated as sum of the active powers
divided by the sum of the nominal powers of all gensets supplying). The power
supplied by the gensets “not managed by MC100” is ignored. In case MC100
measures the power on MGCB and there are other MC100 with MGCB closed, the
power on MGCB is lower than P.3811. Starting from the version 1.39, it is possible to
add a delay by means parameter P.3820: the controller opens MGCB only when the
power supplied by the generators reached the setpoint continuously for this delay. The
default value for this parameter is zero.
 After the time configured with parameter P.3812 is elapsed from the start of the
process.
MC100 does not change the setpoint for the reactive power (see paragraph below) during the
unload ramp. Whatever is the cos(ɸ) required to the controllers, this corresponds in a null value
of reactive power when the active power supplied by a genset tends to zero: so the reactive
power unload is indirectly managed by the genset controllers.
MC100 does not implement any regulations on reactive power. No PI regulators are provided
for reactive power: MC100 select the reactive power setpoint for generators, and the voltage
and reactive power regulation task is performed by each generator control device.
The reactive power setpoint is not expressed as kvar, it is set as a “power factor”, called also
cos(Φ).
MC100 is able to select the cos(Φ) setpoint for generators through the can bus link. This
setpoint is used by the generator control devices only when generators are in parallel with
mains. When they are in “island mode”, generator control devices automatically manage
reactive power sharing (without MC100) between available generators, as a percentage of
their nominal power.
The setpoint sent by MC100 over the can bus is the same for all generators: each generator
control device will convert this setpoint to kvar (based on current active power of that
generator); then it will provide voltage control loop to move generator reactive power to the
required kvar.
On MC100, operator selects the setpoint for cos(Φ) using parameter P.3403 (“cos(Φ)
regulation reference”). It allows selecting values between “0.7 inductive” and “0.9 capacitive”.
The parameter can be modified also in MAN o AUTO modes, and directly from display pages
M.01 and B.01.
Alternatively, it is possible to use a controller analogue input to configure the setpoint. This
input can be connected to a potentiometer, or to any external device that has to adjust the
cos(Φ) setpoint of the plant. To use the analogue input, do the following:
 Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.0031 (“Power Factor reference”)
 Configure the set points related to minimum and maximum voltage acquired by the
input:
o P.3401 - “Cos(Φ) related to minimum input voltage”. Typically “0.7 inductive”

is selected.

o P.3402 - “Cos(Φ) related to minimum input voltage”. Typically “0.9 capacitive”
is selected.
After that, by moving the potentiometer between 0 and 10 Vdc, the setpoint for the cos(Φ)
varies from 0,7 and 0,9 (the setpoint is shown on pages M.01 e B.01 but it cannot be modified).
Note: once you have configured an analogue input with the function AIF.0031, the
parameter P.3403 is no more used.
Important note: only the controllers “managed by MC100” use the cos(Φ) setpoint transmitted
by MC100. The controllers “not managed” by MC100 use the proper local setpoint.

MC100 is able to manage both “Mains Circuit Breaker” (MCB) and “Main Generators Circuit
Breaker” (MGCB).
MGCB circuit breaker is optional for all kinds of plant:
 If it exists, the related lamp shows its status.
 If it does not exist, MC100 considers it existent, externally managed and always
closed. In this case, the related lamp is always switched on.
MCB circuit breaker is never optional.
 For “island” only plants (“MPM”) it is not managed. The related lamp is always
switched off.
 For all other plant types, MCB always exists, and the related lamp shows its status. If
it is configured as not existing, the controller signals a wrong configuration by the
warning 237 and it considers it existent, externally managed and always opened. In
this case, the related lamp is always switched off.
Both circuit breakers can be managed by MC100 or by external devices. If they are managed
by external devices, their statuses must be connected to MC100 (otherwise, MC100 will signal
again a wrong configuration by the warning 273).
Synchronization can be enabled or disabled for each circuit breaker: if disabled the circuit
breaker can only be closed without synchronization.
Finally, it is possible to select the power source for both circuit breakers. In this way MC100
avoids rising alarms or warnings if the breaker is opened with closure command, if power
source is missing.
Parameter P.3002 (“MGCB mode”) and parameter P.3004 (“MCB mode”) are used for circuit
breakers configuration. The available values (for both) are:
 0 – “Not managed”.
 1 – “Not synchronizable”. The circuit breaker exists and it is commanded by MC100.

It can be closed only without synchronization.
 2 – “Synchronizable”. The circuit breaker exists and it is commanded by MC100. It

can be closed with or without synchronization, depending on plant status.
 3 – “External not synchronizable”. The circuit breaker exists and it is commanded by

external devices, MC100 acquires its status. MC100 never performs synchronization
on this circuit breaker.
 4 – “External synchronizable”. The circuit breaker exists and it is commanded by

external devices, MC100 acquires its status. External device can request MC100 to
perform synchronization, for a safe closure of the circuit breaker.
MC100 manages each combination of these parameters, except for P.3004 that can be set to
“0” only for “MPM” (Multiple Prime Mover) plants.
Parameter P.3003 (“MGCB supplied by generators?”) is used for MGCB circuit breaker only,
and allows the following configurations:
 “0”. Circuit breaker can be closed only when voltages are present on generators bus.
When no voltages are present, MC100 never activates alarms or warnings for “circuit
breaker not closed” situations. Also it never tries to close the circuit breaker, even if a
wrong configuration is made with parameter P.3804, to force MGCB closure before

any GCB closure. Note: MC100 doesn’t open the circuit breaker if power source is
missing, it only agrees with possible opening of the circuit breaker.
 “1”. Circuit breaker can be always closed. MC100 can activate alarms or warnings for
“circuit breaker not closed” situations.
Parameter P.3005 (“MCB supplied by mains?”) is used for MCB circuit breaker only, and
allows the following configurations:
 “0”. Circuit breaker can be closed only when voltages are present on mains. If this
voltage is off, MC100 will never activate “closing failure” anomalies: the closing
command will be present only if the automatic intervention of the gensets is not
required. Note: MC100 doesn’t open the circuit breaker if power source is missing, it
only agrees with possible opening of the circuit breaker.
 “1”. Circuit breaker can be always closed. MC100 can activate alarms or warnings for
“circuit breaker not closed” situations.
Four different commands can be used for the management of the MCB breakers:
 DOF.0010 - “MCB (NC) minimum voltage coil”. This feature can be used to supply the
minimum voltage coil (if any) of the circuit breaker. The controller activates this output
when it wants to open the circuit breaker, it deactivates the output when it wants to
close the circuit breaker: the actual closing control will be activated with at least 1.0-
second delay from the deactivation of this output. Usually, you should use a closed
contact, so that with disconnected controller, the minimum voltage coil is excited and
the MCB can be closed. Note: starting from version 1.31, if the circuit breaker is open
without any opening command from the controller (typically for the trip of its
protections), the controller will wait for the delay configured with parameter P.3817
before removing this command.
 DOF.0011 - “MCB opening coil”. The controller enables this output when it wants to
open the circuit breaker: the output goes back in standby once the circuit breaker
feedback indicates that it is open (or when the opening time-out expires).
 DOF.0012 - “MCB closing coil”. The controller activates this input when it wants to
close the circuit breaker (by assuring that DOF.0010 function, if any, isn’t active for at
least 1.0 seconds): the output goes back in stand-by as soon as the circuit breaker
feedback indicates that it is closed (or when the closing time-out expires, or if the
synchronism condition is no more present).
 DOF.0013 - “MCB (NC) steady opening command”. The controller activates this
output when it wants to open the circuit breaker: the output remains active also with
open circuit breaker. The controller deactivates this output when it wants to close the
circuit breaker (by assuring that the possible DOF.0010 function isn’t active for at least
1.0 seconds): the output remains deactivated with closed circuit breaker too. Usually,
you should use a closed contact, in order to close MCB with controller disconnected.
Use this output with the remote control switches, not with the motorized breakers.
Four different commands can be used for the management of MGCB:
 DOF.0020 - “MGCB minimum voltage coil”. This feature can be used to supply the
minimum voltage coil (if any) of the circuit breaker. The controller disables this output
when it must open the breaker, and enables it when it must close the breaker: the real
closing command will be activated with at least 1.0 seconds after the enabling of this
output. Usually, you should use an open contact, in order to de-energize the minimum
voltage coil and open the MCB with controller disconnected. Note: starting from
version 1.31, if the circuit breaker is open without any opening command from the
controller (typically for the trip of its protections), the controller will wait for the delay
configured with parameter P.3817 before removing this command.

 DOF.0021 - “MGCB opening coil”. The controller enables this output when it wants to
open the circuit breaker: the output goes back in standby once the circuit breaker
feedback indicates that it is open (or when the opening time-out expires).
 DOF.0022 - “MGCB closing coil”. The controller enables this output when it wants to
close the circuit breaker (ensuring that the function DOF.0020 has been active for at
least 1.0 seconds): the output goes back in standby once the circuit breaker indicates
that it is closed (or when the closing time-out expires, or the synchronism condition no
longer exists).
 DOF.0023 - “MGCB steady closing command”. The controller enables this output
when it wants to close the circuit breaker (ensuring that DOF.0020 has been active
for at least 1.0 seconds): the output stays active even with circuit breaker closed. The
controller disables this output when it must open the breaker: the output remains
enabled even with the breaker open. Usually, you should use an open contact, so that
MGCB is open with controller disconnected. Use this output with the remote control
switches, not with the motorized breakers.
Of course, it is not necessary to use all possible commands for the circuit breakers. It is
important that the controller, if it has to command the circuit breaker, manages both the
opening and the closing command. The possibilities are:
 Only the static command.
 The static command and the minimum voltage coil.
 The closure command and the minimum voltage coil.
 The closure command and the opening command.
 The closure command, the opening command and the minimum voltage coil.
It is possible to use different commands for the two circuit breakers.
The following table shows the statuses of all command, during each phases of the circuit
breaker management. It is referred to MGCB circuit breaker: remember that “minimum voltage
coil” and “static command” works in the opposite way for MCB circuit breaker.
Circuit Minimum Opening Closing Static
breaker voltage coil coil command
coil
Opened
Closing X X X
Closed X X
Opening X
As in the previous table, MC100 activates different commands when the circuit breaker is
“open” or “closed”. If the circuit breaker status changes, MC100 should change some of its
commands to follow the new status. This is dangerous because the circuit breaker status is
acquired by a digital input, and so possible problems could bring to faulty statuses:
 If circuit breaker status changes from “closed” to “opened”, MC100 can follow the new
status without big problems. In fact, even if the “opened” status is a “wrong”
information (due to disturbs, broken wires and so on); the only problem is an
unnecessary opening of the circuit breaker: in AUTO mode, MC100 will re-close the
circuit breaker if required by plant status. In this case, MC100 does not activate
anomalies.
 If MC100 detects the status of closed circuit breaker while it is open, the actions of
MC100 depend on the fact that there is an output for “stable command”.
o “Stable command” not used. In order to adjust the commands, MC100

would only have to activate the “minimum voltage coil”. This operation alone

does not generate the circuit breaker closing, so it can be carried out without
problems. In this case, MC100 does not activate anomalies.
o “Stable command” used. In order to adjust the commands, MC100 would

have to activate the “stable command”. This operation generates the circuit
breaker closing (without any control), so it cannot be carried out. In this case,
MC100 activates an anomaly.
MC100 grants that the following delays between commands are respected:
 One second between minimum voltage coil and any closure commands.
 The delay configured by parameter P.3808 (“Breakers holding time”) (if set to zero 0.5
seconds are used) between an opening command and the next closure command.
 The delay configured by parameter P.3808 (“Breakers holding time”) (if set to zero 0.2
seconds are used) between a closure command and the next opening command.
 The delay configured by parameter P.3807 (“Breakers swap delay”) between the
opening command of one circuit breaker and the closure command of the other circuit
breaker.
Moreover, opening and closure commands are never set together.
MC100 allows configuring its digital inputs to acquire the circuit breakers statuses. The real
status of a circuit breaker must be wired to MC100 in the following cases:
 The circuit breaker is managed by an external device.
 The circuit breaker is managed by MC100, but only temporary commands are used.
 The type of plant requires the parallel with the mains.
In all other cases, it is possible to work without wiring the real status: MC100 uses its closure
command also as status.
In “parallel to mains” applications, cautions should be used when the breaker status is not
connected to MC100, because it is possible to have power reverse or over-speed problems if
the status is not coherent with the command. The circuit breaker is “closed” when the digital
input is “active (logical state).
Use the following functions to configure the outputs:
 DIF.0010 - MCB Status
 DIF.0020 - MGCB Status
If the circuit breaker status is wired to an input of MC100, it is a good practice to set-up also a
delay for that input: MC100 uses this delay as maximum waiting time during closure/opening
of the circuit breaker. For example, if MCB status is wired to digital input 1, parameters must
be set as:
 P.1401 (“Input 1 function”) = 10
 P.1402 (“Input 1 delay”) = 4.0
In this way, MC100 will wait for maximum four seconds during opening and closure
commands. If the delay is set to zero, MC100 uses a fixed 5 seconds delay.
If the real status of the circuit breaker is wired, MC100 can perform some additional functions:

 Automatically, it carries out up to three closing (when the synchronization is not
required) and opening tests, if the circuit breaker doesn’t close/open with the first
command. A fixed delay of two seconds is used between two consecutive try.
 MC100 activates the “not closed” or “not opened” anomalies if circuit breaker doesn’t
move as required. In manual mode, the controller activates some warnings. In
automatic mode, the controller activates:
o A warning in case of MCB closing failure (W013).
o A warning in case of MCB opening failure (A023).
o A block in case of MGCB opening failure (A014).
o A block in case of MGCB opening failure (A024).
The anomalies of closing failure are not managed in case of synchronization when
closing the circuit breaker: in this case they are replaced by the anomalies of
“synchronization failure” (see 10.7.5 and 10.7.6).
MC100 always allows the opening of MCB.
The closing of MCB is possible only if all the following conditions are checked:
 MCB is not forced to open as “interface circuit breaker” (see 10.3.2.4).
 Only in AUTO, if MCB is configured as “supplied by mains” (P.3005 = 0).
o The mains have to be live and in tolerance according to the AMF thresholds
(see 10.3.1).
o If the plant requires the parallel with the mains, it is configured as interface
circuit breaker (see 10.3.2.4), the mains must be in tolerance according to the
parallel thresholds (see 10.3.2).
Starting from version 1.37, MC100 supports the parameter P.0248 that allows to select the
timing for MCB opening, when the controller is in AUTO mode (for the emergency service to
the mains):
 P.0248=0.
o Plant without MGCB: following a mains failure, MC100 will open MCB when
at least one generator is “ready to supply”.
o Plant with MGCB: following a mains failure, MC100 will open MCB just before
closing MGCB.
 P.0248=1: following a mains failure, MC100 will open MCB as soon as the “mains
failure delay” is elapsed.
If the MCB closing is possible, MC100 can carry it out in three ways, as described below.
With synchronization This happens if all the following conditions are checked:
 Only in MAN and AUTO.
 If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (P.3001>=7).
 If the synchronization on MCB is enabled (P.3004=2 or 4).

 If the mains is in tolerance according to the parallel thresholds (see 10.3.2). Note: in MAN,
it is enough that the mains is in tolerance; in AUTO, it has to be in the time configured in
P.3631.
 If there is voltage on the loads busbars (see 10.6).
 If MGCB exists, it has to be closed.
 If there is voltage on the gensets busbars (see 10.5).
 If an external synchronizer has not been configured (see 10.7), at least a GCB circuit
breaker must be closed (see 10.4).
 If MCB is commanded externally (P.3004=4), the digital input that requires the
synchronization has to be active (function DIF.0013, see 10.7.2.2.1).
 If the gensets are not in parallel with the mains by another MC100 (MC100 does not allow
the simultaneous parallel with two mains).
Directly without synchronization This happens if all the following conditions are checked:
 If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker with the synchronization (see above).
 If MCB is managed by the controller.
 If there is no voltage on the loads busbars (see 10.6).
 If MGCB does not exist, or if it exists but it is closed:
o If there is no voltage on the gensets busbars (see 10.5).
o If there are no gensets with GCB closed (see 10.4).
o If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (otherwise, the controller does
not allow the simultaneous closing of MCB and MGCB).
With changeover switch (opening MGCB). This happens if all the following conditions are
checked:
 If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker without synchronization (see above).
 If MCB is managed by MCB (P.3004 = 1 or 2).
 If MGCB exists (P.3002 <> 0):
o MGCB has to be managed by MC100 (P.3002 = 1 or 2).
 If MGCB does not exist (P.3002 <> 0):
o All controllers with GCB closed must be “managed by MC100”, so that MC100
can force the opening of GCB.
o There shouldn’t be gensets with GCB closed managed by controllers that are
not connected to CAN-BUS PMCB (see 10.4).
if none of the three ways can be used, MCB cannot be closed.
MC100 always allows the opening of MGCB.
The closing of MGCB is possible only if all the following conditions are checked:
 MGCB is not forced to open as “interface circuit breaker” (see 10.3.2.4).

 Only in AUTO, if MGCB is configured as “supplied by gensets” (P.3003 = 0).
o There must be voltage on the gensets busbars (see 10.5).
o At least one GCB must be closed (see 10.4).
If the MGCB closing is possible, MC100 can carry it out in three ways, as described below.
With synchronization This happens if all the following conditions are checked:
 Only in MAN and AUTO.
 If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (P.3001>=7).
 If the synchronization on MGCB is enabled (P.3002=2 or 4).
 If there is voltage on the loads busbars (see 10.6).
 MCB is closed.
 If the mains is in tolerance according to the parallel thresholds (see 10.3.2).
 If there is voltage on the gensets busbars (see 10.5).
 If an external synchronizer has not been configured (see 10.7), at least a GCB circuit
breaker must be closed (see 10.4).
 If MGCB is commanded externally (P.3004=4), the digital input that requires the
synchronization has to be active (function DIF.0023, see 10.7.2.2.1).
 If the warning W271 is not active (”MGCB synchronization failure”).
 If the gensets are not in parallel with the mains by another MC100 (MC100 does not allow
the simultaneous parallel with two mains).
Directly without synchronization This happens if all the following conditions are checked:
 If MGCB is managed by the controller.
 If there is no voltage on the loads busbars (see 10.6), or on the gensets busbars (see
10.5) and there are no gensets with GCB closed (see 10.4).
 If MCB is closed:
o If there is no voltage on the loads busbars (see 10.6).
o If there are no gensets with GCB closed (see 10.4).
o If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (otherwise, the controller does
not allow the simultaneous closing of MCB and MGCB).
o The protections for the parallel with the mains must not be active (see 10.3.2).
 If MCB is open:
o If the plant allows to supply the loads in island mode (P.3001 <> 8).
With changeover switch (opening MGCB). This happens if all the following conditions are
checked:
 If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker without synchronization (see above).

 If MGCB is managed by MCB (P.3002 = 1 or 2).
 If MCB is managed by MCB (P.3004 = 1 or 2).
 If the plant allows to supply the loads in island mode (P.3001 <> 8).
if none of the three ways can be used, MGCB cannot be closed.
If there is a MGCB circuit breaker managed by the controller, and it is closed, MC100
commands its opening.
If there is a MCB circuit breaker managed by the controller, and it is open, in OFF/RESET
mode it can be closed without synchronization: MC100 waits for the gensets to be
disconnected from the loads and then it commands its closing. In order to have MCB closed,
all the following conditions have to be checked:
 There must be no voltage on the busbars of both loads and mains (see 10.6 and 10.3);
otherwise, it’s impossible to close without synchronization.
 If there is a MGCB circuit breaker, it is commanded by the controller and it must be

open.
 If there is not a MGCB circuit breaker, or it is closed but it is commanded externally,

all GCB circuit breakers must be open (with gensets “not managed by MC100” too).
The controller removes the request of start for the gensets “managed by MC100”: this usually
causes the immediate opening of the GCB circuit breakers. This opening may happen after
the phase of fast unload of the power if the two following condition take place:
 MGCB does not exist, or it is closed (commanded externally or in case of opening

failure): the load is still connected to the gensets.
 There are some gensets “not managed by MC100” with GCB closed, which have to
stay in parallel.
The command of all circuit breakers is possible only if there are no blocks and active unloads
(otherwise, the controller acts in OFF/RESET).
If the MCB circuit breaker exists and it is commanded by the controller, it is possible to request
its manual opening and closing in different ways:
 By using the MCB button on the controller panel. This command works as a toggle: it
commands the opening if the circuit breaker is closed, it commands the closing if the
circuit breaker is open.
 By using the digital inputs of the controller (to connect external buttons that allow the
manual opening/closing of the circuit breakers). It is possible to use the following
functions to configure the digital inputs:
o DIF.0011 - “MCB opening command”.
o DIF.0012 - “MCB closing command”.
These commands act on shifting the input from “not active” to “active”, not on the
steady “active” state. It is possible to use both opening/closing commands or just the
closing one. If only the closing command is used, it acts as “toggle”: it commands the
breaker opening if it is closed, or its closing if it is open.
 Using the commands received from the serial ports. It is possible to use the Modbus
register HOLDING REGISTER 20: by inserting the value “4”, MC100 switches the
loads on the mains (and so it opens MGCB and closes MCB). By inserting the value
“5”, MC100 switches the loads on the genset (so it opens MCB and closes MGCB).

 By using a proper “SMS” (see document [4]).
If the MGCB circuit breaker exists and it is commanded by the controller, it is possible to
request its manual opening and closing in different ways:
 By using the buttons SHIFT+MCB of the controller. This command works as a toggle:
it commands the opening if the circuit breaker is closed, it commands the closing if the
circuit breaker is open.
 By using the digital inputs of the controller (to connect external buttons that allow the
manual opening/closing of the circuit breakers). It is possible to use the following
functions to configure the digital inputs:
o DIF.0021 (”MGCB opening request”)
o DIF.0022 (”MGCB closing request”)
These commands act on shifting the input from “not active” to “active”, not on the
steady “active” state. It is possible to use both opening/closing commands or just the
closing one. If only the closing command is used, it acts as “toggle”: it commands the
breaker opening if it is closed, or its closing if it is open.
 Using the commands received from the serial ports. It is possible to use the Modbus
register HOLDING REGISTER 20: by inserting the value “4”, MC100 switches the
loads on the mains (and so it opens MGCB and closes MCB). By inserting the value
“5”, MC100 switches the loads on the genset (so it opens MCB and closes MGCB).
 By using a proper “SMS” (see document [4]).
Note: if MGCB does not exist, or if it is commanded by MC100, the manual commands
described previously manage the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers “managed by
MC100”.
It is always possible to command the manual opening of the circuit breakers.
If the MCB opening is required while the gensets are in parallel with the mains, MC100 tries
to switch the load from the mains to the gensets, then opens MCB (see 10.9.3). If, during the
load switch, the opening of the circuit breaker is required again (button or active digital input
for a second), the MCB circuit breaker is immediately open.
If the MGCB opening is required while the gensets are in parallel with the mains, MC100 tries
to switch the load from the gensets to the mains (by setting 0kW as gensets setpoint), then
opens MGCB (see 10.9.4). If, during the unload ramp, the opening of the circuit breaker is
required again (button or active digital input for a second), the MGCB circuit breaker is
immediately open.
Normally, it is always possible to command the manual closing of the circuit breakers. As
described in the previous paragraphs, MC100 checks if it can close the circuit breaker with the
synchronization or directly without synchronization. If it cannot close it in these ways, check if
it can close it with the switch: so, it is possible that MC100 opens MCB to be able to close
MGCB or vice versa.
MC100 activates some warnings of opening or closing failure of the circuit breakers if it
acquires its feedback.
In case of circuit breaker opening failure, the controller activates the warning W023. In case
of circuit breaker opening failure, the controller activates the warning W024.
If MC100 commands the closing of MCB without synchronization, and MCB does not close,
the controller activates the warning W013. If MC100 commands the closing of MGCB without
synchronization, and MGCB does not close, the controller activates the warning W013.

In automatic modes, MC100 autonomously decides if it has to start/stop the gensets and
open/close the circuit breakers, according to the type of plant, the mains voltage and the status
of the digital inputs. See chapter 10.11.6 for the description of the logics connected to the
different types of plant.
In the automatic management of the circuit breakers (not in manual), even if the circuit
breakers are managed by the controller, it is possible to limit the opening/closing externally. In
details:
MCB circuit breaker
 If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.0015 (”MCB opening
approval”), normally MC100 waits for this digital input to be activated before opening
the circuit breaker.
MC100 ignores the approval if at least one of the following conditions is checked:
o The controller is in OFF/RESET mode.
o The controller is in MAN mode.
o If MGCB does not exist, or if it exists but it is closed.
o The MCB circuit breaker must be opened immediately after the trigger of the
protections for the parallel with the mains.
In the other cases, the procedure followed by MC100 is:
o It activates a possible configured output with the function DOF.0015 (”Ready

to open MCB”), to signal the external logic its need to open the circuit breaker.
o It waits that the configured digital input with the function DIF.0015 becomes
active; this wait lasts for the time configured for the input (P.1402 for input 1).
If the time configured is 0, the wait lasts forever.
o It commands the opening of the circuit breaker.
 If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.0014 (”MCB closing
approval”), normally MC100 waits for this digital input to be activated before closing
o There are active blocks or unloads.
o The intervention of the gensets is not required and MCB has not been opened
by MC100 (so MC100 has to close it again).

to close MCB”), to signal the external logic its need to close the circuit breaker.

o It commands the closing of the circuit breaker (with or without
synchronization).
MGCB circuit breaker
 If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.0025 (”MGCB opening
approval”), normally MC100 waits for this digital input to be activated before opening
o The MGCB circuit breaker must be opened immediately after the trigger of the
protections for the parallel with the mains.
o There are active blocks or unloads.
o The intervention of the gensets is not required and MGCB has not been closed
by MC100 (so MC100 has to open it again).

to open MGCB”), to signal the external logic its need to open the circuit
breaker.
o It commands the opening of the circuit breaker.
 If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.0024 (”MGCB closing
approval”), normally MC100 waits for this digital input to be activated before closing

to close MGCB”), to signal the external logic its need to close the circuit
breaker.
o It commands the closing of the circuit breaker (with or without

synchronization).
Notes MCB
If this circuit breaker exists and is managed by MC100, MC100 normally keep it closed. MC100
opens it only in some cases, depending on plant configuration.
 Parallel to mains. MCB is opened only if the mains fails and if it is configured as
interface circuit breaker. Additionally, it can be opened if the “switch to gensets” mode
is selected after the loads are entirely moved to the gensets (see 10.9.3).

 Stand-by supply MCB is opened before the MGCB closing (or GCB closing in case
MGCB does not exist), to manage the load switch between mains and gensets. In the
same way, MCB is closed after MGCB has been opened (or GCB if MGCB does not
exist); if configured as “synchronizable”, MC100 will try to close it with synchronization,
before opening MGCB.
Notes MGCB
If this circuit breaker exists and it is managed by the controller, MC100 closes it (if required)
with different time, depending on conditions and plant configuration.
 Parallel to mains. Normally MC100 closes MGCB (without synchronization) before

generator’s GCB. This is the best solution, because it avoids multiple synchronization
on each genset. This cannot be done if:
o For any reason, at least one GCB is already closed when MC100 has to close
MGCB.
o MGCB is supplied by the gensets busbar (P.3003=0).
o The operator has selected to close GCB before MGCB by parameter P.3804.
o If MGCB cannot be closed without synchronization, MC100 waits that at least

one GCB is closed, and then closed MGCB with synchronization.
Pay attention to wrong configurations: if MGCB is configured as “not

synchronized” and “supplied by generators bus”, MC100 will never be able to
close it in parallel with grid (it will be necessary to open MCB, close MGCB without
synchronization and then close MCB with synchronization).
 Stand-by supply MC100 closes MGCB (without synchronization) after the gensets
GCB are closed. Parameter P.3805 allows configuring the timings for MGCB closure:
 By setting it to 0, MC100 closes MGCB after the first circuit breaker GCB has been
closed (”immediate supply”), even if it is not a controller “managed by MC100”.
 By setting it to 30000, MC100 waits the closing of GCB of all the available gensets
“managed by MC100”, then it closes MGCB (”end parallel supply”). In this case,
the nominal power of generators is not checked. Parameters:
 By setting it to an intermediate value, MC100 waits that nominal power of all

gensets with GCB closed (including those “not managed by MC100”) is greater
then the set value, and then closes MGCB. Note: if all GCB are closed, the
available power is lower than the threshold, MC100 activates a warning (W008)
and then closes MGCB.
 It is also possible to use a digital input configured with the function DIF.0063
(”Immediate supply”), to force the MGCB closing after the first GCB, whatever is
the value set in parameter P.3805.
The controller records the following events related to the circuit breakers (if enabled with bit 2
and 3 in P.0441):
 EVT.1021: MGCB commanded in closing.
 EVT.1022: MGCB commanded in opening.
 EVT.1023: MGCB closed.
 EVT.1024: MGCB opened.
 EVT.1031: MCB commanded in closing.

 EVT.1032: MCB commanded in opening.
 EVT.1033: MCB closed.
 EVT.1034: MCB open.
Usually, MC100 is able to start/stop the gensets “managed by MC100” and eventually force
the opening of the GCB circuit breakers through commands on the CAN-BUS PMCB line. It is
possible to use also some digital outputs for this purpose. MC100 has the following two
functions for the configuration of the digital outputs:
 DOF.0037 (“Start request”). MC100 activates this output each time the intervention of
the gensets is required (both in MAN and AUTO). MC100 deactivates this output when
the intervention of the gensets is no longer required. It is possible to wire this output
on the digital inputs of the gensets controllers in order to command the start/stop of
the engines.
 DOF.0038 (”Ready to supply”). MC100 activates this output to signal that it is possible
to connect the loads to the gensets. The output activates only in AUTO, TEST and
REMOTE START, if there are no “load inhibitions” in the following cases:
o If there is a MGCB circuit breaker:
 If MGCB is closed, the output is active.
 If MGCB is open, the output is active when the nominal power of the
gensets with GCB closed is enough to supply the loads (see
description in 10.11.5.5).
o If there is not a MGCB circuit breaker:
 If GCB is closed, the output is active.
 if no GCB is closed:
 If there is a MCB circuit breaker, but it is commanded

externally and the plant does not consider the parallel with
the mains:
o If MCB is closed: the output activates when all

gensets “managed by MC100” are started; if there
are no gensets “managed by MC100”, the output
activates when at least one genset is started.
o If MCB is open, the output is active when the nominal

power of the gensets with GCB closed is enough to
supply the loads (see description in 10.11.5.5).
 In other cases, the output activates when the nominal power

of the gensets with GCB closed is enough to supply the loads
(see description in 10.11.5.5).

This paragraph describes all the plant types managed by MC100, selectable by parameter
P.3001. MC100 manages only plant types with more than one genset; anyhow, it is possible
to work (with this plants) even with only one genset. The following notes are valid for all types
of plant:
 See paragraph 10.1 for the list of the conditions, so that a genset controller is
considered “managed by MC100” (remember that, in any case, the genset controllers
have to be at least in AUTO to be “managed by MC100”).
 The gensets “managed by MC100” can be started only if MC100 is not in OFF/RESET
and if there are no blocks and/or unloads.
 In MAN, the operator can start/stop the gensets “managed by MC100” with the buttons
START and STOP. To start/stop the gensets “not managed by MC100”, use the
related controllers.
 See paragraph 10.11.5.1 for a list of the minimum conditions that allow the closing of
the MCB circuit breaker.
 See paragraph 10.11.5.2 for a list of the minimum conditions that allow the closing of
the MGCB circuit breaker.
 See paragraph 10.11.5.4 for the description of the manual commands for the circuit
breakers.
 See paragraph 10.11.4 for the anomalies of the circuit breakers opening/closing
failure.
 See paragraphs 10.7.5 10.7.6 for the anomalies of the circuit breakers synchronization
failure.
The plants are divided according to the necessary conditions for the automatic intervention of
the gensets. From this point of view, there are three types of plant:
 Stand-by production plant. The term “island mode” indicates the situation in which one
or more gensets supply a load, without being in parallel with the mains. The automatic
intervention of the plant is always required, independently from the mains status. The
parallel with the mains is not allowed.
 Emergency plant The automatic intervention of the plant is required in case of

anomalies of the mains. The parallel with the mains is allowed, even if it is not the
normal operation for this type of plant.
 System for the production in parallel with the mains. The automatic intervention of the
plant is required only if the mains is live and in tolerance. The supply in “island mode”
is not allowed.
The following table shows a recap of all types of plant according to what has been said:
Production Parallel Supply in

Production
in parallel with the “island
P.3001 in island AMF
with the mains mode”
mode
mains approved approved
MPM X No Yes
MSB X No Yes
MSB + MSTP X X Yes Yes
MPtM X Yes No
MPtM + MSB X X Yes Yes

The acronyms indicated in the first column will be described in detail below. It is important to
understand well the difference between the plants “MSB + MSTP” e “MPtM + MSB”: both
allow, in fact, both the supply in “island mode” and the supply in “parallel with the mains”. The
difference consists in the mode in which the automatic intervention of the genset is required:
 The plant “MSB + MSTP” is an “emergency” power plant and so it will be started
(automatically) only in case of mains anomaly. In order to allow the gensets parallel
with the mains, you need to force the start when the mains is live (through the
REMOTE START or TEST mode, see 10.2).
 The plant “MPtM + MSB” is both a “supply in island” and production “in parallel with
the mains” plant. Automatically, the gensets are started when the mains is in tolerance
and when it is out of tolerance or off: in the first case, the plant will be “in parallel with
the mains”, in the second case, it will be “in island mode”.
The different types of plant will be described in detail below. Before describing them, the
functions that allow to impede the automatic intervention of the gensets and their connection
to the load/mains are described.
If the controller is in AUTO mode, whatever the status of the mains is, the automatic
intervention of the genset “managed by MC100” (see 10.1) can be prevented in several ways,
which are described in the following paragraphs.
The activation of "inhibition automatic intervention" is signalled by displaying a padlock icon in

the title bar on every page of the display.
Note: this function can be used only in AUTO mode, it has no effect in MAN, TEST and
REMOTE START modes.
The activation of the “automatic intervention inhibition” forces also the opening of the MGCB
circuit breaker and the closing of MCB (when present and commanded by the controller).
The controller can use a digital input programmed for the function “automatic intervention
inhibition” of the genset (function DIF.0041 – “start inhibition command"). In case of “active”
input, the gensets “managed by MC100” are never automatically started, not even if the plants
condition require it.
Use parameter P.3801 to set a delay between input's physical activation and this function's
logic activation: the delay can only be applied if the controller is in AUTO mode, otherwise the
delay is null. Use parameter P.3802 to set a delay between input's physical de-activation and
this function's logic de-activation: in case there are gensets “ready to supply” (even not
managed by MC100), the delay reduces to two seconds (fixed); in case there would be gensets
with GCB closed (even not managed by MC100), the delay is null.
The value set in the parameter that configures the delay of the used digital input (P.1402 for
digital input 1) is ignored.
The board records any changes of this specific inhibition:
 EVT.1071: inhibition activated.
 EVT.1072: inhibition deactivated.
By using the parameters P.4401, P.4402 and P.4403, it is possible to select the days of the
week and a time during which the gensets “managed by MC100” are enabled to work. Outside
this time (and during not-selected days), the function of “inhibition to the automatic
intervention” is active (and so the gensets will be stopped).

In particular, with the parameter P.4401 you can set the days of the week in which the gensets
can work and the other two allow to select an hour range valid for all the selected days. The
range start time (P.4402) refers to the days set in P.4401, while the range end time (P.4403)
refers to the same day, if its value is higher than P.4402, or to the following day if lower (across
midnight). Moreover, setting P.4402 and P.4403 to the same value, you define a full day range.
To set the values in parameter P.4401, refer to the following table:

Bit Hexadecimal value Day
1 01 Sunday
2 02 Monday
3 04 Tuesday
4 08 Wednesday
5 10 Thursday
6 20 Friday
7 40 Saturday
In systems that provide only the supply in parallel with the mains (MPtM), if the mains fails,
MC100 would force the opening of MGCB (or GCB in case MGCB does not exist) and, after a
configurable waiting time (P.3810), it activates the “inhibition to automatic intervention” to stop
the gensets “managed by MC100” until the mains will be “in tolerance” again.
In multiple generator parallel plants, a generator's GCB switch might not open when the
generator is stopped. This is dangerous, as the voltage of the two other gensets (or mains)
that are working transfers the alternator of the genset with “GCB not open”. In this condition,
despite the stop command, the engine would keep running with all external services (oil
pumps, etc) potentially disconnected. In these conditions, it is possible to impede the MGCB
closing (P.3704=1), and also to force its opening in case it is already closed (P.3704=0): if this
lasts for the time configured with the parameter P.3810, the gensets are stopped (by means
of the “inhibition to automatic intervention”) waiting until the problem is solved.
This description applies to the plants where MGCB exists and it is commanded by
MC100.
Automatically, once the gensets “managed by MC100” are started, the controller always tries
to connect the gensets to the load or to the mains (according to the type of plant), by closing
the MGCB circuit breaker. In these conditions, it is possible to force the disconnection of the
gensets from the load and the mains, by using the “inhibition to power load” function. When it
is active, this function forces the opening of MGCB: if the controller commands MCB too, it will
close it after having opened MGCB (if there are no causes that force its opening).
This internal function intervenes in all automatic modes (AUTO, TEST and REMOTE START).
The activation of this function does not require the activation of anomalies.
If the “inhibition to power load” is activated when MGCB is closed, the controller tries to open
it, by carrying out the unload of the gensets power first (if it is possible, see 10.9.4).
It is possible to activate this function in different ways, described in the following paragraphs.
The board records an event when the "inhibition to power load" is activated and deactivated
(for any reason):
 EVT.1073: at least one inhibition activated.
 EVT.1074: all inhibitions are deactivated.

It is possible to configure a digital input with the function DIF.0044 (”Load inhibition
command”). When this input is active, the inhibition to power load is active.
By writing the value "20" in the HOLDING REGISTER 20 Modbus register, inhibition to power
load is activated, by writing the value "21" it is disabled. This control remains active for 30
seconds from the time it is received by MC100: it is therefore necessary to repeat it about
every 25 seconds until the inhibition to power load should be kept active.
In systems that provide the supply in parallel with the mains only (MPtM), if the mains fails,
MC100 will force the immediate opening of MGCB, and will activate the “inhibition to power
load” in order to stop its closing. The inhibition will be cancelled when the mains is "within
tolerance" again.
In multiple generator parallel plants, a generator's GCB switch might not open when the
generator is stopped. This is dangerous, as the voltage of the two other gensets (or mains)
that are working transfers the alternator of the genset with “GCB not open”. In this condition,
despite the stop command, the engine would keep running with all external services (oil
pumps, etc) potentially disconnected. In this condition, it is possible to impede the closing of
MGCB (P.3704=1) and also force its opening in case it would be closed (P.3704=0): the
controller activates the “inhibition to power load” to impede the MGCB closing (or to force its
opening).
In case the synchronization for the MCB circuit breaker fails and the plant can permanently
supply in parallel with the mains (and the automatic intervention is required), MC100 can
require the MGCB opening (if commanded by MC100 and if it is possible to use the
synchronization for its closing) in order to close MCB without synchronization and then try
again to close with the synchronization of MGCB. The controller uses the “inhibition to power
load” to open and maintain MGCB opened for this phase. Note: this function is enabled only if
P.3815 is set to “1”.
If MGCB is configured as “supplied by the gensets voltage” (P.3003=0), the controller has to
wait to have at least one GCB closed (and voltage on the gensets busbars) before closing
MGCB. The controller uses the “inhibition to power load” to open and maintain MGCB opened
for this phase. This inhibition is removed two seconds after the voltage is detected on the
gensets busbars.
If the controller is in “TEST” mode, the parameter P.4301 determines if the gensets have to be
connected to the load/mains or not:
 P.4301 = “0” (the gensets do not have to be connected to the load/mains). The
controller uses the “inhibition to power load” to open and maintain MGCB opened for
this phase.
 P.4301 = “1” (the gensets have to be connected to the load/mains). Usually, the
controller does not activate the inhibition to power load. Anyhow, if the gensets are
already in parallel with the mains through another MC100, this controller cannot allow
the parallel with a second mains and it proceeds to open MCB and close MGCB (by
means of a load black-out): if the synchronization is enabled on MGCB (P.3002=2),
probably the black-out is not required. In this case, MC100 activates the inhibition to
power load anyway, in order to impede the load black-out until the parallel with the
mains (by means of another MC100) is stopped.

In particular conditions, MC100 is able to force the opening of the GCB circuit breakers of the
controllers “managed by MC100” (see 10.1). This forcing represents an inhibition to the power
load for the gensets controllers, which will be active only if said controllers are in automatic
mode. The gensets controllers, if they can, proceed with the opening of GCB, by unloading
the gensets power (fast unload).
Note: MC100 is not able to force the GCB opening of the “not managed” controllers, unless by
activating a block that involves the gensets controllers too (for example the emergency stop).
The inhibitions to power load described in 10.13.2 usually apply on MGCB. They are not
converted in forcing the GCB opening of the controllers “managed by MC100” in the following
cases:
 If MGCB does not exist (so MC100 cannot open it).
 If MGCB is commanded externally and it is closed (so MC100 cannot open it).
 If MGCB is commanded by the controller, but the anomaly of “opening failure” is active
(MC100 has not managed to open it).
In case MGCB is not commanded by the controller, MC100 checks if it is possible to activate
the synchronization on MCB before forcing the opening of GCB: if it is possible, it does not
activate the forcing until MCB is closed or until it activates the anomaly of “synchronization
failure” on MCB. During the “synchronization” phase on MCB, the inhibition to power load due
to the mains failure (see 10.13.1.3) is converted in forcing the GCB opening.
The inhibition to power load (see 10.13.2.1) is immediately converted in forcing the opening of
GCB if MGCB is not commanded by MC100 and it is closed.
This description applies only to the plants where MGCB does not exist or it is not
commanded by MC100. It only applies with the controller in MAN mode and if there are
not blocks and/or unloads.
The manual commands for MGCB in this case work on the GCB circuit breakers of the
controllers “managed by Mc100” (see 10.11.5.4). Following to the opening manual commands,
MC100 forces the opening of the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers “managed by MC100”;
following to the closing manual commands, MC100 removes the opening of the GCB circuit
breakers.
When the MC100 operation mode goes from an automatic one to MAN, MC100 has to maintain
the current condition of the GCB circuit breakers: it forces the opening of GCB if in that moment
no controller “managed by MC100” has the GCB circuit breaker closed (impeding further
closings). Then the operator will be able to use the manual command of closing for MGCB to
remove the forcing and allow the closing of the GCB circuit breakers.
If the gensets “managed by MC100” are commanded to start in MAN and MGCB does not
exist or it is closed, the controller forces the opening of the GCB circuit breakers of the
controllers “managed by MC100” to impede the controllers to close them automatically: the
operator then will use the manual command of closing for MGCB to remove the forcing and
allow the closing of the GCB circuit breakers.
If other forcing for the GCB opening are activated (as described below), MC100 activate a
forcing too, so that when the other forcing will be deactivated, the controllers won’t
automatically close the GCB, but an operator manual command will be necessary.
Following to the manual closing of MCB, if the parallel with the mains is not allowed, after the
time is up, MC100 forces the immediate opening of the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers
“managed by MC100” and it activates this forcing too, in order to impede further automatic
closing of GCB.

See 10.13.2.4. What described above can be applied also to the GCB circuit breakers of the
controllers “managed by MC100”.
This description applies to the plants where MGCB exists and it is commanded by MC100.
In case of plants that require the supply in “island mode” on the load, the MGCB circuit breaker
has to necessarily closed after at least one GCB circuit breaker is closed. Anyhow, it is possible
to decide to command the MGCB closing only after the rated power of the gensets with closed
GCB is higher than the threshold configured (P.3805 see 10.11.5.5).
If MC100 detects MCB open, MGCB closed and no GCB closed, it forces the opening of the
GCB circuit breakers of the controllers “managed by MC100” (to impede its closing) until the
opening its own MGCB. Then, it removes its forcing, allowing the genset controllers to close
their own GCB. Finally, at the proper moment, it will close MGCB.
This description applies to the plants where MGCB exists and it is commanded by
MC100.
This forcing is important to maintain opened the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers
“managed by MC100” (not to force their opening if they are already closed), when MC100 has
to close MGCB before GCB during the sequence of parallel with the mains. This can happen
in two conditions:
 If it has been specifically configured (parameter P.3804=0).
 If it is not possible to use the synchronization for the closing of MGCB (P.3002=1).
Note that in order to close MGCB before GCB, the parameter P.3003 has to be set at 1 (that
is the MGCB circuit breaker cannot be supplied by the gensets busbar voltage).
The controller forces the opening of GCB if there are no GCB closed among the controllers
“managed by MC100”, if MCB is closed and the mains is in tolerance: in this way, the
controllers do not close their own GCB until MC100 closes MGCB. Then MC100 removes the
forcing and the controllers will close their own GCB with synchronization.
If the controller needs to close MCB but it cannot do it with synchronization (P.3004=1) and
the MGCB circuit breaker does not exist or it is closed and commanded externally (so it cannot
be opened), MC100 forces the opening of GCB of the controllers “managed by MC100” in
order to close MCB without synchronization. Once the MCB is closed, it will remove the forcing
and the controllers will be able to close their GCB with synchronization.
Note: this forcing is used only if there are no controllers “managed by MC100” with
GCB closed (the purpose is to open all GCB not to have voltage on the loads).
The same logic is used in case of synchronization failure on MCB, even if MGCB is
commanded by the controller but the synchronization cannot be used for its closing
(P.3002=1). Following to the synchronization on MCB, it is not possible to open MGCB to allow
the closing of MCB, as it would be impossible to close it again (the synchronization would be
required): in this condition, MC100 forces the opening of the GCB circuit breakers of the
controllers “managed by MC100” in order to disconnect the load and close MCB without
synchronization. When MCB is closed (MGCB was already closed), MC100 removes the
forcing to allow the gensets controllers to close their GCB with synchronization again.
If the operator commands the MGCB manual closing but the controller cannot do it with the
synchronization (P.3002=1) and the MCB circuit breaker is closed and commanded externally

(so it cannot be opened), MC100 forces the opening of GCB of the controllers “managed by
MC100” in order to close MGCB without synchronization. Once the MGCB is closed, it will
remove the forcing and the controllers will be able to close their GCB with synchronization.
The same logic is applied automatically if the controller is not able to close MGCB neither with
the synchronization nor directly or by opening the MCB circuit breaker.
Note: this forcing is used only if there are no controllers “managed by MC100” with
GCB closed (the purpose is to open all GCB not to have voltage on the loads).
Note that in order to close MGCB before GCB, the parameter P.3003 has to be set at 1 (that
is the MGCB circuit cannot be supplied by the gensets busbar voltage).
If the mains is live, MCB is closed and MGCB does not exist or it is commanded externally
and it is closed, the controller activates this forcing to disconnect the gensets “managed by
MC100” from the mains (it cannot open MGCB) in the following conditions:
 If the plant does not require the parallel with the mains (P.3001<7).
 It the type of plant only requires the temporary parallel with the mains, if the parallel
lasts for more than one second (this should happen only if MCB is not commanded by
MC100 or in case of opening failure).
This type of plant requires the production in “island mode”. They are the typical gensets of the
building sites, where the operator decides when the gensets have to supply or not. The parallel
with the mains is not allowed.
Parallel functions Available
Synchronization for MGCB Not available
Synchronization for MCB Not available
Protections for the parallel with the mains: Not available
Management of the active power in parallel with the Not available

mains:
Management of the power factor in parallel with the Not available

mains:
Function “transfer to gensets” Not available
In this type of plant, MC100 ignores the mains and MCB status. It is not possible to close the
MGCB circuit breaker with synchronization: this means that MC100 does not allow the MGCB
closing if, in case of a wiring fault, MC100 detects the simultaneous presence of voltage on
both sides of the circuit breaker.
Automatic sequence
The automatic intervention of the genset is required in the following conditions:
 In AUTO: if no “inhibition to automatic intervention” is active.
 In TEST and REMOTE START: always, ignoring the “inhibition to automatic

intervention”.
When there are gensets ready to supply, MC100 has to decide if closing the MGCB circuit
breaker or not (if it exists). The circuit breaker has to be always closed, except for the following
cases:
 There are active blocks or unloads.

 The stop of the genset is required.
 There is an active “inhibition to power load”.
If the opening of MGCB is not required, the controller has to decide in which moment to close
the circuit breaker: see the description of the parameter P.3805 at paragraph 10.11.5.5.
The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC100 commands the MGCB circuit breaker) will
be:
1. MGCB open, gensets “managed by MC100” stop. If the automatic intervention of

the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.
2. MGCB open, gensets “managed by MC100” start. If there are gensets “managed
by MC100”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller waits that at least
one genset “managed by MC100” is ready to supply and then the procedure skips to
point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the gensets start with the
parameter P.3803. If this parameter is different from zero, and the starting phase lasts
more than the value configured, the controller activates the warning W022. During the
waiting, in case of blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer
required, the procedure skips to point 8.
3. MGCB opened. If the gensets have to be stopped (blocks or unloads, or if the

automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 8. If there
are requests of “inhibition to power load”, the procedure stays at this point. Otherwise,
it continues:
 To point 4, if there is no voltage on load.
 To stay in this point if there is voltage on the load busbar (rare, as MGCB is
opened and MCB does not exist).
4. MGCB open, waiting for gensets The controller checks if the number of gensets
with GCB closed and their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in
parameter P.3805. If they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by
MC100” that has to close their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5. During the
waiting, in case of blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer
5. Closing without synchronization of MGCB (three attempts). In case of closing

failure, the alarm A014 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to
point 8. Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 6.
6. MGCB closed. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if there are no requests of

“inhibition to power load”, the procedure skips to point 7. If the automatic intervention
of the genset is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 7.
7. Opening of MGCB (three attempts): MGCB opens, the procedure skips to point 3. If
MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the
procedure skips to point 8.
8. Stop. MC100 removes the request of gensets “managed by MC100” start. If there are
other MC100 requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends at point 1.
Otherwise, MC100 waits for the gensets stop. It is possible to set a maximum duration
for this waiting: if the parameter P.3813 is set to a different value from zero, the
controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do not stop within
this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure ends at point 1.
If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the procedure continues
from point 2.
The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC100 does not command the MGCB circuit
breaker) will be:
1. Gensets “managed by MC100” stop. If the automatic intervention of the plant is


2. Gensets “managed by MC100” start. If there are gensets “managed by MC100”, the
procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller waits that at least one genset
“managed by MC100” is supplying and then the procedure continues to point 3. It is
possible to set a maximum duration for the gensets start with the parameter P.3803.
If this parameter is different from zero, and the starting phase lasts more than the
value configured, the controller activates the warning W022. During the waiting, in
case of blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required, the
3. Supplying. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if the automatic intervention of the

genset is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 4. If there are requests for
“inhibition to power load”, the procedure stays in this status: if MGCB is closed, the
requests of inhibition are transformed in opening commands of the GCB circuit
breakers of the controllers “managed by MC100”.
from point 2.
This type of plant requires one or more gensets to carry out the emergency to mains service.
MC100 starts the gensets if the mains is “out of tolerance” with respect to the time configured;
it stops them if the mains is “in tolerance”. See paragraph 12.1: if configured, MC100 can
require the intervention of the gensets even in case of closing failure of the MCB circuit
breaker. The parallel with the mains is not allowed.
Synchronization of MGCB Not available
Protections for the parallel with the mains: Not available
Management of the active power in parallel with the Not available

mains:
Management of the power factor in parallel with the Not available

mains:
It is not possible to close MCB and MGCB with synchronization: this means that MC100 does
not allow the circuit breaker closing if the other is closed. Moreover, it does not allow the
closing of any circuit breaker if, for a wiring fault, MC100 detects the simultaneous presence
of voltage on both sides of the circuit breaker.
Automatic sequence
The automatic intervention of the gensets is required in the following conditions:
 In AUTO: if no “inhibition to automatic intervention” is active and if:
o The mains is “out of tolerance”
o The mains is live but the controller does not manage to close the MCB circuit
breaker (if configured, see 12.1).

intervention”.
When there are gensets ready to supply, MC100 has to decide if let the gensets supply the
load. This has to be always done except when:
If the supply of the load from the gensets is required, the controller has to decide when to carry
out the switch. MC100 never closes MGCB before GCB. Parameter P.3805 allows configuring
when to close the circuit breaker (see 10.11.5.5).
The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC100 commands both MCB and MGCB circuit
breakers) will be:
1. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MC100” stop. If the automatic
intervention of the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.
2. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MC100” start. If there are
gensets “managed by MC100”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the
controller waits that at least one genset “managed by MC100” is supplying and then
the procedure continues to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the
gensets start with the parameter P.3803. If this parameter is different from zero, and
the starting phase lasts more than the value configured, the controller activates the
warning W022. If the gensets have to be stopped (blocks or unloads, or if the
automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 12.
3. MCB closed, MGCB open. If the gensets have to be stopped (blocks or unloads, or
if the automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 12. If
there are requests of “inhibition to power load”, the procedure stays at this point.
Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 4.
4. Gensets wait. The controller checks if the number of gensets with GCB closed and
their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in parameter P.3805. If
they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by MC100” that has to
close their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5. If the gensets have to be stopped
(blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required), the
5. MCB opening (three attempts) In case of closing failure, the alarm A023 is activated
(MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 12. Otherwise, the procedure
continues to point 6.
6. MCB open, MGCB closed. The controller waits for the time configured with
parameter P.3807, then it continues to point 7. If the gensets have to be stopped
(blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required), the
procedure skips to point 11. If there is an inhibition, the procedure skips to point 11.
7. MGCB closing (three attempts) In case of closing failure, the alarm A014 is activated
(MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 11. Otherwise, the procedure
8. MCB open, MGCB closed. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if there are no

requests of “inhibition to power load”, the procedure skips to point 9. If the automatic
intervention of the genset is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 9.
9. Opening of MGCB (three attempts): MGCB opens, the procedure skips to point 10.
If MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the

10. MCB open, MGCB closed. The controller waits for the time configured with
parameter P.3807, then it continues to point 11.
11. MCB closing (three attempts) In case of closing failure, the alarm A013 is activated
from point 2.
The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC100 commands the MCB circuit breaker only)
will be:
1. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MC100” stop. If the automatic intervention of

2. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MC100” start. If there are gensets “managed
one genset “managed by MC100” is supplying and then the procedure continues to
more than the value configured, the controller activates the warning W022. If the
gensets have to be stopped (blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no
longer required), the procedure skips to point 8.
3. MCB closed. If the gensets have to be stopped (blocks or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 8. If there are requests
of “inhibition to power load”, the procedure stays at this point.
If MGCB is closed, the procedure continues to point 5 to open the MCB circuit breaker
immediately (otherwise, the controllers cannot close GCB because the plant does not
require the parallel with the mains). Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 4.
4. Gensets waiting (MGCB open). The controller checks if the number of gensets with
GCB closed and their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in
parameter P.3805. If they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by
MC100” that has to close their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5. If the external
logic closes MGCB, the procedure immediately skips to point 5. If the gensets have to
be stopped (blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required),
the procedure skips to point 8.
6. MCB open. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if the automatic intervention of the

genset is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 7. If there are requests for
“inhibition to power load” and MGCB is closed, the requests of inhibition to switch are
transformed in opening commands of the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers
“managed by MC100”.
7. MCB closing (three attempts) In case of closing failure, the alarm A012 is activated

from point 2.
This type of plant is similar to the previous one: it requires one or more gensets to carry out
the emergency to mains service. MC100 starts the gensets if the mains is “out of tolerance”
with respect to the time configured; it stops them if the mains is “in tolerance”. See paragraph
12.1: if configured, MC100 can require the intervention of the gensets even in case of closing
failure of the MCB circuit breaker.
With respect to the MSB plant, MC100 allows the parallel with the mains.
Usually, the parallel with the mains is temporary (P.3006=0): it is used to avoid a black-out on
the load during their switch from gensets to mains (when it is back) or from mains to gensets
(in case if forced intervention in TEST or REMOTE START). In this case, the maximum
duration for the parallel with the mains is 1 second: anyhow, it can be configured with the
parameter P.3816. Please read the description of the warning W207 that is related with this
parameter.
This type of plant allows the parallel with the mains (if P.3006 is different from zero). Usually,
you use this function to test the gensets (TEST) without disconnecting the load from the mains.
In this case, there is no limit in the parallel duration.
Function Available
Synchronization of MGCB Available
Synchronization for MCB Available
Protections for the parallel with the mains: Available
Management of the active power in parallel with the Available

mains:
Management of the power factor in parallel with the Available

mains:
Function “transfer to gensets” Available
Automatic sequence
 In AUTO: if no “inhibition to automatic intervention” is active and if:
o The mains is “out of tolerance”
o The mains is live but the controller does not manage to close the MCB circuit
breaker (if configured, see 12.1).

intervention”.

If the supply of the load from the gensets is required, the controller has to decide when to carry
out the switch. MC100 never closes MGCB before GCB. Parameter P.3805 allows configuring
when to close the circuit breaker (see 10.11.5.5).
The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC100 commands both circuit breakers) will
be:
controller waits that at least one genset “managed by MC100” is ready to supply and
then the procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the
there are requests of “inhibition to take the load”, the procedure waits in this point.
Otherwise, it continues:
 To point 12 if it is possible to close MGCB with the synchronization and the

parallel with the mains is allowed (P.3006>0).
 To point 4 in other cases.
4. MCB closed, MGCB open, genset waiting. The controller checks if the number of
gensets with GCB closed and their nominal power correspond to what has been
configured in parameter P.3805. If they correspond (or if there are no other genset
“managed by MC100” that has to close their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5 and
it is not possible to close MGCB with synchronization; otherwise, to point 12. If the
longer required), the procedure skips to point 17. If there are inhibitions, the procedure
skips to point 3.
5. MCB opening, MGCB open (three attempts). In case of closing failure, the alarm
A023 is activated (MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 17. Otherwise,
the procedure continues to point 6.
6. MCB open, MGCB closed. If the gensets have to be stopped (blocks or unloads, or
there is an inhibition, the procedure skips to point 10. Otherwise, the controller waits
for the time configured with parameter P.3807, then it continues to point 7.
7. MGCB closing without synchronization (three attempts) In case of closing failure,

the alarm A014 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 10.
8. MCB open, MGCB closed. If there are alarms or unloads, requests of inhibition to
power load or the automatic intervention of the genset is no longer required, the
procedure continues:
 To point 9 if it is not possible to close MCB with synchronization.
 To point 11 if it is not possible to close MCB with synchronization.
9. Opening of MGCB, MCB open (three attempts): MGCB opens, the procedure skips
to point 6. If MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not closed)
and the procedure skips to point 17.

10. MCB closing without synchronization (three attempts) In case of closing failure,
the alarm A013 is activated (MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 17.
11. MCB closing with synchronization This phase lasts maximum P.3809 seconds. If
during this time MCB closes, the procedure skips to point 13. Otherwise, the controller
activates the warning W272 (”synchronization failure on MCB”): the controller will not
allow the synchronization for the MCB closing if the operator does not “acknowledge”
this warning. The procedure goes back to point 8.
12. MGCB closing with synchronization This phase lasts maximum P.3806 seconds. If
during this time MGCB closes, the procedure skips to point 13. Otherwise, the
controller activates the warning W271 (”synchronization failure on MGCB”): the
controller will not allow the synchronization for the MGCB closing if the operator does
not “acknowledge” this warning. The procedure goes back to point 3.
13. MCB closed, MGCB closed If the gensets must be stopped for an alarm, the
procedures skips to point 16. If some unloads are activated, the automatic intervention
is no longer required, or some requests of “inhibition to power load” are activated, the
procedure continues to point 15. If the parallel with the mains is not allowed (or the
maximum time allowed for the parallel with the mains expires), the procedure
continues to point 14. If the “transfer to gensets” mode is active, when the gensets
reach the power setpoint configured by MC100, the procedure continues to point 14.
14. MCB opening, MGCB closed (three attempts). In case of closing failure, the alarm
A023 is activated (MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 17. Otherwise,
15. MCB closed, MGCB closed, power unload If the parallel with the mains is not
allowed (or the maximum time allowed for the parallel with the mains expires), the
procedure continues to point 16. During this phase, MC100 establishes a power
setpoint equal to 0 kW for the gensets. Then, it controls the active power supplied by
the gensets “managed by MC100” (expressed in percentage): when it goes under the
threshold P.3811, the procedure continues to point 16. In any case, the maximum
duration of this phase can be configured with the parameter P.3812 : when the time is
up, whatever the power supplied by the gensets is, the procedure continues to point
16. If there are not alarms or unloads, the requests of “inhibition to power load” are
not activated and the automatic intervention is required, the procedure continues to
point 13.
16. Opening of MGCB, MCB closed (three attempts): MGCB opens, the procedure skips
from point 2.
The logic of automatic normal operation (if MC100 commands MCB only) will be:
1. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MC100” stop. If the automatic intervention of

2. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MC100” start. If there are gensets “managed
one genset “managed by MC100” is ready to supply and then the procedure skips to
more than the value configured, the controller activates the warning W022. If the

longer required), the procedure skips to point 9.
3. MCB closed.
If the gensets have to be stopped (blocks or unloads, or if the automatic intervention

is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 9.
If there are requests for “inhibition to power load”, the procedure stays in this status:
if MGCB is closed, the requests of inhibition are transformed in opening commands of
the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers “managed by MC100”; the gensets will
download the power before opening GCB.
MGCB opened. The controller checks if the number of gensets with GCB closed and
their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in parameter P.3805. If
they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by MC100” that has to
close their GCB):
 If there is a digital input to require the synchronization of MGCB, the procedure

stays in this status waiting for the request. When the request is active, the
 If there is no digital input (and MGCB cannot be closed with synchronization),

MGCB closed: MC100 checks:
 There are gensets with GCB closed. If the parallel with the mains is not
allowed (or the maximum time allowed for the parallel with the mains expires),
the procedure continues to point 4. If the “transfer to gensets” mode is active,
when the gensets reach the power setpoint configured by MC100, the
procedure continues to point 4.
 There are no gensets with GCB closed. If there are gensets ready to supply,
but the mains is out of tolerance (so, the gensets cannot close their GCB with
synchronization), the procedure continues to point 4.
5. MCB open.
The actions depend on the MGCB status.
MGCB opened.
If there are alarms or unloads, requests of inhibition to power load or the automatic
intervention of the genset is no longer required, the procedure continues to point 6.
Otherwise, the procedure stays in this status.
MGCB closed.
If there are alarms or unloads, the procedure skips to point 9.
If there are “inhibitions to power load”, or the automatic intervention is not required,
the controller continues to point 7 if it is possible to use the synchronization for the
closing of MCB; otherwise, it waits for MGCB or GCB to open.
6. MCB closing without synchronization (three attempts) In case of closing failure,

the alarm A013 is activated (MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 9.
7. MCB closing with synchronization This phase lasts maximum P.3809 seconds. If
during this time MCB closes, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller
activates the warning W272 (”synchronization failure on MCB”): the controller will not

allow the synchronization for the MCB closing if the operator does not “acknowledge”
this warning. The procedure goes back to point 5.
during this time MGCB closes, the procedure skips to point 13. Otherwise, the
controller activates the warning W271 (”synchronization failure on MGCB”): the
controller will not allow the synchronization for the MGCB closing if the operator does
not “acknowledge” this warning. The procedure goes back to point 5.
Otherwise, MC100 waits for the gensets stop: if MGCB is closed, the gensets will
download the power before opening the GCB circuit breakers. It is possible to set a
maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.3813 is set to a different value
from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.
This is a plant for the production in parallel with the mains. MC100 starts the gensets “managed
by MC100” if the mains status allows the parallel; it disconnects the gensets from the mains if
the protections of parallel with the mains are activated (see 10.3.2); it stops the gensets if the
mains status does not allow the parallel for P.3810 seconds.
The supply in “island mode” is not allowed: so, if the protections of parallel with the mains are
activated, MC100 opens the MGCB circuit breaker anyway (if it exists), whatever is the
interface circuit breaker selected with parameter P.3601 (see 10.3.2.4). It is possible to select
MGCB as interface circuit breaker (P.3601=2).
The parallel with the mains as to be continue, so the parameter P.3006 has to be set at a value
different from zero.
Synchronization for MGCB Available

mains:

mains:
Automatic sequence
 In AUTO: if there is no inhibition to the automatic intervention and the mains status
allows the parallel with the mains.

intervention” and the mains status.
When there are gensets ready to supply, MC100 has to decide if connect the gensets to the
mains. This has to be always done except when:

The logic of normal operation in automatic mode (if MC100 commands both circuit breakers
and if MGCB is the interface device) will be:
controller waits that at least one genset “managed by MC100” is ready to supply and
then the procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the
there are requests of “inhibition to take the load”, the procedure waits in this point. If
the mains is out of tolerance, the procedure waits in this point (after P.3810 seconds,
an inhibition to intervention is activated to automatically removes the request of
intervention). Otherwise, it continues:
 To point 4, if you decided to close the MGCB circuit breaker before the GCB
one (by means of the parameter P.3804) and if there are no GCB closed.
 To point 5 if it is not possible to close MGCB with synchronization.
 In the other cases, it stays in this status.
4. MGCB closing without synchronization (three attempts) In case of closing failure,

the alarm A014 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 9.
during this time MGCB closes, the procedure skips to point 6. Otherwise, the controller
activates the warning W271 (”synchronization failure on MGCB”): the controller will
not allow the synchronization for the MGCB closing if the operator does not
“acknowledge” this warning. The procedure goes back to point 3. If during the waiting
the mains is out of tolerance, the procedure goes back to point 3.
6. MCB closed, MGCB closed
If alarms or the protections for the parallel with the mains are activated, the procedure
If some unloads are activated, the automatic intervention is no longer required, or

some requests of “inhibition to power load” are activated, the procedure continues to
point 7.
7. MCB closed, MGCB closed, power unload During this phase, MC100 establishes a
power setpoint equal to 0 kW for the gensets. Then, it controls the active power
supplied by the gensets “managed by MC100” (expressed in percentage): when it
goes under the threshold P.3811, the procedure continues to point 8. In any case, the
maximum duration of this phase can be configured with the parameter P.3812 : when
the time is up, whatever the power supplied by the gensets is, the procedure continues
to point 8. If there are no alarms or unloads, there are no requests of inhibition to
power load, the mains is permanently in tolerance and the automatic intervention is
required, the procedure goes back to point 6.

8. Opening of MGCB, MCB closed (three attempts): MGCB opens, the procedure skips
from point 2.
In this type of plant, the gensets cannot supply neither in “island” nor in “parallel with the mains”
mode. it is similar to the MSB + MSTP plant. The differences are:
 This plant is not an emergency plant; so, the request of the gensets automatic
intervention is not related to the mains status.
 The parallel with the mains has to be allowed (P.3006>=0).
As the supply in island mode is allowed, it is suggested (but not compulsory) to select MCB
as interface circuit breaker (P.3601=2).
Synchronization of MGCB Available
Synchronization for MCB Available

mains:

mains:
Function “transfer to gensets” Available
Automatic sequence
 In AUTO: if no “inhibition to automatic intervention” is active.

intervention”.
See 10.13.5 for an example of operating logic.

“Load function” is the ability of MC100 to automatically start/stop the gensets “managed by
MC100” according to the power required by the load or the parallel with the mains setpoint.
The display pages B.09 and B.10 are related to this function.
Note: the gensets controllers have their own “load function”, but it is disabled when
they are managed by MC100. If, at a precise moment, the gensets “managed by MC100”
are in parallel with the gensets “not managed by MC100”, all with the load function
enabled, the two managements may conflict.
Load function, if enabled, works on all plant types:
 In parallel with mains, load function starts the correct number of generators to allow
the system supplying power as requested by the setpoint, starting/stopping additional
generators if setpoint changes. Note: in “BASE LOAD” mode, the setpoint can only be
changed by the operator, while in “IMPORT/EXPORT” mode it changes also if some
loads are added or removed.
 In “island mode”, load function starts the generator as required by current loads,
starting/stopping additional generators on changes.
Load function is enabled only in AUTO and REMOTE START modes. So, in MAN or TEST
modes generators are never stopped due to load (switching from AUTO or REMOTE START
to MAN or TEST the currently started generators are kept running).
In AUTO and REMOTE START modes, load function is normally enabled. It is possible, but
not compulsory, to configure an input with the function DIF.0056 “Load function enable” If this
input is configured, load function is disabled when the input is “not active” (logical state). If the
input is not configured or if it is “active”, load function is enabled.
If a MGCB circuit breaker exists, load function is disabled if this circuit breaker is opened: in
this situation no loads are connected to generators and load function could stop them.
The main purposes of the load function are:
 Start the correct number of generators to supply the required power.
 Grant that all generators will be used, not always the same ones.
MC100 allows configuring two thresholds (%) related to load function:
 P.3505 - “Activation load threshold”.
 P.3507 - “Deactivation load threshold”.
The second threshold must be lower than the first one. They should be set to quite the same
value; the purpose of difference is only to define a hysteresis, to avoid unnecessary start/stop
if active power changes around the thresholds.
MC100 calculates the system total power % dividing the sum of active powers of each
generator by the sum of their nominal powers (both are transmitted by generator control
devices over the can bus):
n
 ADP x
DPRt  xn1
 MDP
x 1
x
n: number of generators with GCB closed.

ADPx: generator x active power.
MDPx: generator x nominal power.
DPRt: System total power %.
Note: these calculations are carried out on all genset supplying, not only on those
managed by MC100.
When the total percentage power (DPRt) is higher than the threshold P.3505 for the time set
with the parameter P.3506 (“Activation gensets delay”), MC100 has to start new gensets
“managed by MC100”. It is possible to select starting one genset or all available gensets by
parameter P.3511 (“Gensets starting mode”).
 P.3511 = 0. Only one generator is started when system total power is higher than
activation threshold. This configuration avoids unnecessary starts/stops (and
unnecessary commands on GCB circuit breakers), but has two problems when used
in “island mode”:
o Suppose that generator to be started has problems, so, after n cranks, its
control device activates an alarm. MC100 will detect this situation and will
select another generator to be started, but much time is elapsed from
activation request, and currently started generators may be not able to supply
the loads (maximum power or maximum currents alarms may be activated by
generator control devices).
o Even if the selected generator starts without problems, its power may be lower
than required by the increase on loads.
 P.3511 = 1. All available generators are started when system total power is higher
than activation threshold. In a second time, unnecessary generators will be stopped.
This solution avoids problems described in the previous point, but it results in
unnecessary starts/stops and unnecessary circuit breaker commands.
In order to decide to stop one genset “managed by MC100”, MC100 first selects the genset to
be stopped (hereinafter identified as genset y) and then it calculates the percentage power
ratio % the system will supply if the generator would be stopped.
n
 ADP x
DPRtn  n
x 1
 MDP  MDP
x 1
x y
y: generator to be stopped.
X: it indicates any genset, except for the genset y.
ADPx: generator x active power.
MDPx: generator x nominal power.
MDPy: generator y nominal power.
DPRtn: system total power ratio % if generator y is stopped.
Note: these calculations are carried out on all genset supplying, not only on those
managed by MC100.
When this system total power (DPRtn) is lower than threshold P.3507 for the time set by
parameter P.3508 (“Deactivation load delay”), MC100 stops the generator y.

Parameter P.3510 (“Minimum number of working gensets”) allows selecting the minimum
number of started generators, whatever is the load: MC100 never stops generators (indeed it
may start some of them) if currently started generators are less or equal to the desired number.
Note that minimum value for this parameter is “1”, so at least one generator is always running.
Note: these calculations include all genset supplying, not only on those managed by
MC100.
Every time a GCB circuit breaker is opened or closed, MC100 stops checking the power (and
so no genset will be started/stopped) for the time set with the parameter P.3509 (“Initial delay”):
in this way the system has time for stabilization.
If automatic genset supply is required when all generators are stopped (for example when
mains become “absent” in emergency plants), MC100 always starts all available generators.
Note: by pressing START on MC100, the load function is temporary suspended, by forcing the
start of all available gensets “managed by MC100”. Once all generators are supplying, load
function will stop unnecessary ones. This possibility is useful each time the operator knows in
advance that an increase of power is needed: he can start all generators and, when all are
supplying, new loads can be added or the power setpoint can be increased. In this way, you
will have the necessary power whenever you need it, even in AUTO mode and with the load
function enabled.
The gensets “not managed by MC100” (see 10.1) are always “excluded” from the load
function.
Normally, instead, all generators “managed” by MC100 are involved in load function. It is
possible to manual exclude some “managed” generators from load function (forcing them
always stopped or always running). This manual operation has to be performed on display
pages from B.05 to B.08, which show details about each generator (see description in 6.3.4.5).
Note: the manually excluded generators list is not saved on non-volatile memory. At power on,
all “managed” generators are included in load function.
Note: MC100 can stop all generators involved in load function. This happens when at least
P.3510 “not managed” generators are running, and there is no power request for other
gensets.
The logics described below work only on gensets that, at a given time, are included in the load
function (and so implicitly “managed by MC100”).
To ensure that all generators are used (not always the same ones), MC100 assigns a priority
to them:
 Low priority generators are started for last and stopped for first.
 High priority generators are started for first and stopped for last.
 The highest priority generator, at a given time, is called “master”.
Actually MC100 implements three different techniques for assigning priorities to generators,
selectable by parameter P.3501 (“Load function mode”).
Set “1” in parameter P.3501 to select this mode.
In this mode, the operator manually selects the “master” genset using parameter P.3502
(“Master genset address”). Other gensets priorities are automatically assigned depending on
addresses. Suppose generators 1 to 8 are present on the plant. Suppose also that generators
3, 4 and 7 are excluded from load function (see previous paragraph). The remaining gensets
are:
1, 2, 5, 6, 8.

If the operator selects the genset “5” as “master”, the priority list will be:
5, 6, 8, 1, 2.
8, 1, 2, 5, 6.
1, 2, 5, 6, 8.
The priority list is made by following the order address of gensets (increase order) starting
from the “master” up to the highest one; then starting from the lowest to the one preceding the
“master”.
In this mode, the operator can always manually select the “master” genset using parameter
P.3502. At the time configured by the parameter P.3503 (“Master genset change time”),
however, MC100 will select a new “master”. The new “master” selected is the one following
the old “master” in the priority list (obviously among the gensets included in the load function).
Let’s suppose that the priority list set in P.3502 is “5,6,7,1,2”; the new “master” genset will be
the genset “6”.
You can assign priorities to the following gensets as described above.
In this mode, the “rotation” of generators happens once a day.
In this mode, the operator can always manually select the “master” genset using parameter
P.3502. After the number of hours configured with parameter P.3504 “Master genset switch
hours”, MC100 will select a new “master”. The new “master” is the one following the old
“master” in the priority list (obviously among the generators included in load function).
Let’s suppose that the priority list set in P.3502 is “5,6,7,1,2”; the new “master” genset will be
the genset “6”.
You can assign priorities to the following gensets as described above.
In this mode, the “rotation” of generators happens every x hour.
When a new “master” is selected, a new priority list is built. At this time, it is possible that some
lower priority generators are running, while some high priority generators are stopped. In this
case, MC100 grants that first the high priority generators will be started and loaded, and then
the low priority ones will be stopped. In this way there will be no problems on power supply.
The controller records the event EVT.1081 when the master genset is changed (if configured
with the bit 9 of the parameter P.0441).
The purpose of “load shedding” function is to manage some digital outputs of MC100, in order
to connect/disconnect part of loads from the generators, when generators are not able to
supply all loads. Display page B.11 is related to this function (see 6.3.4.11).

This function is normally enabled; it is disabled in the following situations:
 If the controller is in MAN or OFF/RESET mode.
 In parallel to mains operations (the eventually extra loads are supplied by mains).
 If a digital input is configured with the function DIF.0060 “Load shedding” and the input
is “not active” (logical status). If the input is not configured, or if it is “active”, the
function is enabled.
 If no digital outputs of MC100 are configured for “load shedding”. Four functions are
available for digital outputs configuration:
o DOF.0050 (“Load-shedding 1”).
It is possible to manage up to four groups of loads. Remember that the same function
(DOF.0050 - DOF.0053) can be assigned to more than one output: in this way, a single logical
group of loads can be connected/disconnected from the gensets by using more than one circuit
breaker at the same time.
Outputs are “active” when MC100 needs to disconnect loads from generators, they are “not
active” when loads can be re-connected.
If less than four outputs are used, configure them continuously starting with function 50. For
example, if you would like to use two outputs, configure them with the functions DOF.0050
and DOF.0051. If you accidentally use the functions DOF.0050 and DOF.0052, only the first
output configured with the function DOF.0050 will be used. If you use the functions DOF.0051
and DOF.0052, no output will be associated to the function “load shedding” (because the
function DOF.0050 is missing).
Loads must be assigned to outputs depending on their priority:
 The output configured with the function DOF.0050 should be used for lowest priority
loads: it is the first activated (to disconnect a load) and the last deactivated (to re-
connect a load).
 The output configured with the function DOF.0053 should be used for highest priority
loads: it is the last activated (to disconnect a load) and the first deactivated (to connect
a load).
If “load shedding” function is disabled and some of its digital outputs are configured, these
outputs are “not active” in order to avoid disconnection of loads. All loads management
There are some situations, however, where all loads are connected or disconnected at the
same time. Loads are all disconnected (independently by actual power) when:
 In “island mode”, in the moment the MGCB circuit breaker is closed.
 In “island mode”, if the MGCB circuit breaker does not exist or it is closed without while
GCB is not closed, in the moment the first GCB circuit breaker is closed.
 When passing from “parallel to mains” to “island mode” (at the opening time of MCB).
In the same way, all outputs are deactivated at the same time when:
 Each time loads are separated from generators by any circuit breakers.

In “island mode” it could be possible that “load shedding” and “load function” have to work
together. If some loads are removed, “load function” stops the unnecessary generators, if all
generators are running and loads increase, “load shedding” disconnects some loads.
It is important to select what MC100 has to do if not all available generators are running, and
loads increase in a way that “load shedding” needs to disconnect some loads. Two options
are available by parameter P.3557 - “Load disconnect mode”:
 “0 – Wait for load function”. In this case “load shedding” is disabled until all available
generators are running. Only after that, loads can be disconnected from generators.
This option avoids unnecessary loads connection/disconnection (important when the
operator is involved to re-connect the loads); if “load function” takes a long time to
start the next generator, however, this could result in “maximum power” or “maximum
current” alarms on currently running generators.
 “1 - Immediate”. In this case loads immediately are disconnected, even if not all
available generators are running. “Load function” will then start necessary generators,
and when enough power is available, loads will be re-connected. This option avoids
“maximum power” and “maximum current” alarms: however, some unnecessary
disconnection of loads may happen, and this could be a problem if the operator is
involved for re-connecting the loads.
MC100 provides two thresholds (%) related to “load shedding”:
 P.3551 - “Load disconnect threshold”.
 P.3553 - “Load re-connect threshold”.
The second threshold must be lower than the first one. P.3551 threshold must be set at the
maximum allowed power per generator (%). P.3553 threshold must be carefully calculated
depending on loads connected/disconnected, to avoid that when a load is connected the total
power becomes greater than P.3551 and so load is disconnected again, and so on.
MC100 calculates the system total power % by dividing the sum of active powers supplied by
all the gensets (”not managed by MC100” included) by the sum of their nominal powers (both
information are transmitted by the gensets controllers on CANBUS):
n
 ADP x
DPRt  xn1
 MDP
x 1
x
ADP: generator x active power.
MDP: generator x nominal power.
DPRt: System total power %.
When the system total power (DPRt) is higher than the threshold P.3551 for the time set by
parameter P.3552 (“Load disconnect delay”), MC100 disconnects the lowest priority loads (see
above for load priorities).
MC100 can be configured to automatically or manually re-connect the loads. This choice is
available by parameter P.3556 (“Load re-connect mode”):
 0 – “Automatic”. MC100 checks system power before allowing loads connection. The
system total power (%) must be less than the P.3553 threshold, for the time set by
parameter P.3554 (“Load re-connect delay”).

 1 – “Manual”. Note: this option needs for a digital input configured for “load connection
command” (see in the following).
Each time a group of loads is connected/disconnected from generators, MC100 stops

monitoring the power (and so no other loads can be connected/disconnected) for the time set
by parameter P.3555 (“Initial delay”), to allow system stabilization.
MC100 allows configuring two digital inputs to be used for “load shedding” manual command.
Functions to be used for the inputs configuration are:
 DIF.0061 (“Manual disconnection of part of the loads”).
 DIF.0062 (“Manual disconnection of part of the loads”).
Note: these inputs are managed both in MAN and AUTO modes.
Both inputs work on activation and not on the state of the input (the function related to the
input is executed once when input state changes form “not active” to “active” – logical state).
The activation of input configured as DIF.0061 will result in the disconnection of the lowest
priority load (the next activation will disconnect the next load and so on until all loads are
disconnected).
The activation of input configured as DIF.0062 will result in the re-connection of the highest
priority load (the next activation will re-connect the next load and so on until all loads are
connected).
If “not-motorized” circuit breakers are used to connect/disconnect loads, MC100 is not able to
automatically re-connect loads. In this case parameter P.3556 must be set to “0”: when MC100
detects that a group of loads can be re-connected, it automatically deactivates its output and
the circuit breaker is no more forced “open”. The operator can then manually close the circuit
breaker.
If it is configured with the bit 9 of the parameter P.0441, the controller records the following
events related to the unload function:
 EVT.1082: load #1 has been disconnected.
 EVT.1083: load #1 has been connected.

This chapter describes all the anomalies managed by the board. Before describing them in
detail, it is opportune to give some definitions.
We define three typologies of anomaly:
 Warnings: these anomalies don’t require the arrest of the generators. They point out
to situations that are not dangerous at the moment, but the operator must take some
action because, if ignored, they could degenerate in one of the following categories.
 Unloads: these anomalies require the arrest of the generators. As they do not create
problems for the loads and the gensets, in case of parallel operations, it is suggested
to perform the opening of the power connection (MGCB) after the power unloading.
The controller commands the stop of the gensets “managed by MC100”, by
maintaining MGCB closed. The single gensets controllers will download the power
and open their GCB circuit breakers. When all GCB of the controllers “managed by
MC100” are open, MC100 opens the MGCB circuit breaker. However, it is not possible
to restart the engine until the anomaly has not been acknowledged.
 Alarms: these anomalies require the arrest of the generators. They are dangerous for
the loads and/or for the generators. For this reason, the MGCB circuit breaker is
immediately open and the controller immediately commands the stop of the gensets
“managed by MC100”: the real stop of the gensets is carried out by the normal
procedure that includes the cooling cycle. It is not possible to restart the generators
until someone takes care of the anomaly.
An alarm can be activated if no other alarms are already active (there are some exceptions,
which will be listed below). There could be some unloads and warnings.
An unload can be activated if no alarms or deactivations are present. Instead, some warnings
can be active.
A warning can be activated if no alarms or unloads are present. Instead, some warnings can
be active.
When an anomaly is activated, the board performs the following actions:
 It activates the internal horn and, if configured, the external one too (function
DOF.0040 – External horn).
 It forces the multifunction display on the S.02. This page shows the fault numeric code
and the current language text related to the anomaly. The numeric code flashes to
indicate that the anomaly hasn't been recognized by the operator yet.
 It activates the “ALARM/WARNING” flashing led if the anomaly belongs to the warning
category, or the steady led if the anomaly belongs to alarms or unloads categories.
 If the anomaly is not a warning, it disconnects the gensets from the loads or the parallel
busbars and it stops the ones “managed by MC100”.
The following operations can be carried out on an anomaly:
 Silence the horn.
 Acknowledge: this indicates to the board that the operator has taken action about the
situation.
 Reset: it tells to the board that the anomaly is not more active.

The multifunction display shows the anomaly until the operator “acknowledges” it, even if the
relevant cause is no longer present (sequence ISA2C). The controller automatically resets all
the acknowledged warnings when their cause is not still active.
It is possible to silence the buzzer by pressing ACK/ENTER key on the board panel. This
operation does not detect the anomaly, which continues to flash on the display.
The management of the hooter is anyway linked to the value of P.4501 parameter (“duration
of hooter control”):
 If set to zero, the horn will be never activated.
 If the hooter is set on 999, it will be activated when a new anomaly arises and
deactivated through the above-described procedure (never automatically).
 If the hooter is set on a value between 1 and 998, it will be activated when a new
anomaly arises and deactivated through the described procedure above, or when the
configured time span has elapsed.
The anomaly can be identified in two ways:
 By pressing the ACK/ENTER key on the board panel. If you push this key when the
hooter is on, it stops the hooter: it should be pressed a second time to “recognize”
the anomaly.
 By using a digital input configured with the function DIF.0070 - “Alarm reset
command”. The anomalies are acknowledged when the input goes from “inactive” to
"active".
 Using the commands from the serial ports. Write the value "2" in the HOLDING
REGISTER 20 Modbus register to acknowledge anomalies. NB: this control also
cancels the hooter, in case it is active.
The previous operations “identify” all active anomalies. The relevant numeric codes on the
display stop flashing.
An anomaly can be cancelled only when the cause that activated it is no more present.
The board automatically reset all the acknowledged warnings when their cause is not still
active.
On the contrary, to cancel discharges, deactivations and shut-downs, it is necessary to follow

one of the below procedures:
 By putting the controller in OFF/RESET mode.
 By using a digital input configured with the function DIF.0071 - “Alarm reset
command”. Anomalies are cancelled when the input from "inactive" turns into "active".
 Using the commands from the serial ports. Write the value "1" in the HOLDING
REGISTER 20 Modbus register to cancel anomalies.
 By using an “SMS” control (see document [4]).
The following functions for the configuration of digital outputs are linked to anomalies:

 DOF.0040 (“external horn”). This output is activated and deactivated along with the
internal hooter. It can be used to control a more powerful hooter and/or a lamp.
 DOF.0041 (“reset of anomalies”). The board activates this output for one second
when the internal sequence for the cancellation of anomalies is carried out. This
output can be used also to cancel any anomalies managed externally by other
devices.
 DOF.0060 (Bit mapping). There are the bits that indicate:
 At least a early warning is active.
 At least an unload is active.
 At least a shut-down is active.
 At least a non-recognized early warning is active.
 At least an unload is active.
 At least a non-recognized shut-down is active.
Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.3704
To disable: -
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.
MC100 activates this anomaly when it detects (from information sent over CAN BUS PMCB)
that at least one genset is in a “GCB not open” condition (GCB closed while an opening
command is active). In this situation, the parameter P.3704 selects the actions on the MGCB
circuit breaker:
 “0”. This setting forces an MGCB opening (and obviously avoids next MGCB closures.
 “1”. This setting avoids MGCB closures (but doesn’t force MGCB opening if already
closed).
 “2”. Use this setting when you want that the “GCB not open” condition is not involved
in the MGCB management.
Note: the gensets controllers have its own equivalent parameter to configure actions
on GCB.
Typology: Alarm
Related parameters: -
To disable: -
Enabled if: AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.
This anomaly is activated when pressing the STOP pushbutton on MC100, or if a stop
command is received from the serial ports or by SMS.
Typology: Warning
To disable: P.3805 = 0 o P.3805 = 30000

This anomaly is enabled only if MGCB circuit breaker exists, and if it is managed by MC100.
Moreover, it is enabled only when generators have to supply in “island” mode. MC100
activates this anomaly before MGCB closure, if all available generators are supplying but the
sum of their nominal powers is lower than the power requested with parameter P.3805. It
signals that generators may be unable to supply all loads. Values “0” and “30000” of P.3805
are special; they disable this anomaly. The value “0” configures MC100 to close MGCB as
soon as one GCB is closed; the value “30000” forces MC100 to wait for all available generators
are supplying (whatever their power is).
Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.1401 (or equivalent for inputs 2-18)
To disable: P.1401 <> DIF.0010
MC100 activates this anomaly after three consecutive closing commands without results (in
MAN after the first attempt). It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not
configuring an input to acquire the circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain
situations, see 10.11.4).
Typology: Warning / alarm

MC100 activates this anomaly after three closing commands of the circuit breaker without
result (in MAN mode after the first attempt): it is a warning in MAN mode and an alarm in the
other modes. It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not configuring an input
to acquire the circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain situations, see 10.11.4).
Typology: Warning / unload / alarm

Related parameters: P.1306 P.3901 P.3902 P.3903 P.3904
To disable: P.1306 = 0 o P.3902 = 0 o P.3903 = 0
MC100 activates this anomaly when at least one current is higher than the configured
threshold.
The threshold (P.3901) is a percentage of the nominal current of the system, set by parameter
P.1306. The threshold can be configured between 0% and 999%, with 0.1% resolution.
The delay (P.3902) of the protection can be set between 0 and 4000 seconds, with 0.1 seconds
resolution. If the delay is set to zero, the protection is disabled: so the minimum delay is 0.1
seconds.
Parameter P.3904 selects the typology:
 73: Warning.
 74: Unload.
 75: Alarm.
 76: Gensets block
The protection can work in four different ways, as selected by parameter P.3903:

1. This value selects a “fixed time” protection. The anomaly is activated when at least
one current is higher than the threshold P.3901 for the time P.3902. Note: the check
is made both on instantaneous and average current values; if one or both is higher
than the threshold the protection can be activated.
2. This value selects the same protection of the previous one: the only difference is that
the real threshold is decreased respect to the configured one if the voltages are lower
than the nominal.
120,00%
100,00%
Tensione (% della nominale)
80,00%
60,00%
40,00%
20,00%
0,00%
0,00% 20,00% 40,00% 60,00% 80,00% 100,00% 120,00%
Soglia reale (% della soglia impostata)
3. This value selects a time-related maximum current protection (it activates so much
more quickly how much higher is the overload). The used curve is named
EXTREMELY INVERSE, and implements an I2t function.
We define a maximum current threshold (P.3901), and the maximum time the
generator can work with this current (P.3902). If the current is lower than the defined
threshold, the protection is not activated. If the current become greater than the
threshold, the protection is activated with a time inversely proportional with the entity
of the over current. In order to correctly set the thresholds, follow the following steps:
 You must set the nominal current of the system (P.1306).
 Configure the maximum current threshold by the P.3901 parameter, as a

percentage of the nominal current.
 Configure the intervention time for the protection in the P.3902 parameter: the
protection will be activated exactly after the time you’ve configured if the
current is constantly equals to the P.3901 threshold multiplied by 2.
In order to calculate the intervention time for a preferred current, please use the
following formula:
P.3902
tI  2
 I 
  1
 P.3901 
I is the current in the circuit.

You must keep in mind that the board calculates the integral value of the current in the
time, so all the current samples over the threshold concur to determine the intervention
time, with their instantaneous weight as defined in the previous formula. The only way
to verify exactly this formula is thus to switch instantaneously from a normal load
situation to an over load situation.
The following graph shows the used curve, with P.3902 set to 60 seconds (I is the
maximum current): Parameters:P.3902
Tempo intervento
1000
100
Intervention time (seconds) I
10
0,1
1 10
Multiple of I
4. This value selects the same protection of the previous one: the only difference is that
the real threshold is decreased respect to the configured one if the voltages are lower
than the nominal (see description for value 2).
Typology: Warning / unload / alarm

Related parameters: P.1306 P.3906 P.3907 P.3908 P.3909
To disable: P.1306 = 0 o P.3907 = 0 o P.3908 = 0
The same as anomaly “016”, with the parameter listed above.
Typology: Warning
To disable: P.3813 = 0
This anomaly is activated when at least one genset managed by MC100 is still running after
the delay set in the parameter P.3813 from the stop command.
Typology: Warning

This anomaly is activated when none of the gensets managed by MC100 is running after the
delay set in the parameter P.3803 from the start command.

MC100 activates this anomaly in the following situations:
 If MC100 commands the circuit breaker, but it is closed by an external logic (not in
MAN mode). The anomaly is set only if the “static command” is used to manage the
circuit breaker (see 10.11.2). It’s an alarm. Starting from version 1.31, the controller
will wait for 0.5 seconds before activating the alarm.
 After three opening commands of the circuit breaker without result (only one attempt
in MAN mode): in this case, it is a warning in MAN mode and an alarm in the other
modes.
It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not configuring an input to acquire the
circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain situations, see 10.11.4).

MC100 activates this anomaly in the following situations:
 If MC100 commands the circuit breaker, but it is closed by an external logic (not in
MAN mode). The anomaly is set only if the “static command” is used to manage the
circuit breaker (see 10.11.2). It’s an alarm. Starting from version 1.31, the controller
will wait for 0.5 seconds before activating the alarm.
 After three opening commands of the circuit breaker without result (only one attempt
in MAN mode): in this case, it is a warning in MAN mode and an alarm in the other
modes.
It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not configuring an input to acquire the
circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain situations, see 10.11.4).
Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.4021 P.4022
MC100 activates this anomaly when power supply voltage drops down under the threshold
P.4021 for the time set with parameter P.4022. Note: the threshold P.4021 is expressed as a
percentage of the supply rated voltage, which is configurable but it is automatically selected
by the controller between 12 and 24 Vdc. Selection is made when the controller is powered
and every time it is forced in OFF/RESET mode. A nominal voltage of 12 V is selected if power
supply voltage is lower than 17 V.

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.4023 P.4024
MC100 activates this anomaly when power supply voltage grows up over the threshold P.4023
for the time set with parameter P.4024. Note: the threshold P.4023 is expressed as a
percentage of the supply rated voltage, which is configurable but it is automatically selected
by the controller between 12 and 24 Vdc. Selection is made when the controller is powered
and every time it is forced in OFF/RESET mode. A nominal voltage of 12 V is selected if power
supply voltage is lower than 17 V.
Typology: Alarm
Related parameters: Related parameters P.1401 P1402 (or equivalent for inputs 2-
18)
This anomaly is activated if the input configured with the function DIF.0072 – “Emergency”
stays not active consequently for the related time.
Typology: Warning
MC100 activates this anomaly when its internal temperature is greater than the threshold
P.4011, even for a very little time.

These anomalies are identical; they differ only for the related input. The following description
is common for all these anomalies, but refers to parameters related to input 1(P.1401, P.1402
e P.1403). Consider the parameters related to your used input.
Typology: Configurable
Related parameters: P.1401 P.1402 P.1403
To disable: P.1401 <> (DIF.0073, DIF.0074, DIF.0075, DIF.0076, DIF.0077,
DIF.0078)
Parameter P.1401 configures the kind of anomaly. The following codes are available:
 DIF.0073 (“Warning”).
 DIF.0074 (“Unload”).
 DIF.0075 (“Alarm”).

 DIF.0076 (“Alarm transmitted to gensets too”).
 DIF.0077 (“Warning (MCB)”).
 DIF.0078 (“Alarm (MCB)”).
MC100 activates the anomaly when the configured input is activated consecutively for the
configured time (P.1402). The message for the anomaly is the one configured for the input
P.1403.
Typology: Warning
To disable: -
This anomaly is activated each time the CANBUS internal interface of the controller switches
to the BUS-OFF status. Normally the “BUS-OFF” condition is related to wiring problems (short
circuits between CAN-H and CAN-L lines, for example).
Typology: Warning
To disable: -
This anomaly is activated when two or more MC100 devices are connected to the same can
bus line, and they have the same address for PMCB (parameter P.3701).
Typology: Warning
MC100 activates this anomaly if the number of generator control devices communicating over
the can bus PMCB is different from what configured by parameter P.3702. In this case,
parameter P.3703 can be used to inhibit MGCB closure (but not to force its opening). By setting
the parameter P.3702 to “0”, you disable this command.
Typology: Warning
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, AVVIAMENTO REMOTO.
MC100 activates this anomaly if P.3602 has been set to a value different from zero, and the
duration of the parallel to the grid was longer than this parameter. MC100 opens the MGCB
circuit breaker and doesn’t allow its closure until the operator acknowledges this warning.
MC100 can activate this warning even when the function “transfer to gensets” is enabled, if at
the end of the configured delay the power is not yet transferred to the gensets (because the
nominal power of the gensets is not enough for the loads): in this case, if the power on the
loads would decrease (or if new gensets became available), MC100 will close again MGCB
circuit breaker even if the warning has not been acknowledged.

In order to keep the compatibility with older versions (they opens MCB at the end of the
configured time), the parameter P.3819 is provided. It is a bit-field parameter, allowing the
operator to select in which conditions MCB opening as to be allowed at the end of configured
time:
 Bit 0: in MAN mode.
 Bit 1: in AUTO mode.
 Bit 2: in TEST mode.
 Bit 3: in REMOTE START mode.
 Bit 7: in case of failure in opening MGCB.
Note: the parameter is provided only for compatibility reasons. For new plants, it should be set
to zero.

This anomaly is activated only during automatic synchronization, for MGCB closure. If the
circuit breaker is not closed after the P.3806 delay, MC100 activates the anomaly: it’s a
warning in MAN mode, an alarm in all other modes.
Typology: Warning
This anomaly is activated only during automatic synchronization, for MCB closure. If the circuit
breaker is not closed after the P.3806 delay, MC100 activates the anomaly.

To disable: -
MC100 activates this anomaly to signal a “wrong configuration” of parameters. In the “S.02”
display page, a detailed description shows the real cause of the anomaly. Possible causes
are:
 The parameter which require the “SICES” password (see 7.1.3) are never been set
after the first factory configuration. It’s an alarm.
 Selected plant type (P.3001) is different from “MPM”, and the MCB circuit breaker is
configured as “not managed” (P.3004). It’s an alarm.
 MCB circuit breaker is configured as “external” (P.3004) and no digital input is

configured to acquire its status (function “10 - MCB status” – IF_10). It’s an alarm.
 MCB circuit breaker is managed by MC100 without static commands, and no digital
input is configured to acquire its status (function “10 - MCB status” – IF_10). It’s an
alarm.

 MCB circuit breaker is configured as “external synchronizable” (P.3004), and no digital
input is configured to acquire external synchronization requests (function “13 - MCB
external synchro request” – IF_13). It’s an alarm.
 MGCB circuit breaker is configured as “external” (P.3002) and no digital input is

configured to acquire its status (function “20 - MGCB status” – IF_20). It’s an alarm.
 MGCB circuit breaker is managed by MC100 without static commands, and no digital
input is configured to acquire its status (function “20 - MGCB status” – IF_20). It’s an
alarm.
 MGCB circuit breaker is configured as “external synchronizable” (P.3002), and no

digital input is configured to acquire external synchronization requests (function “23 -
MGCB external synchro request” – IF_23). It’s an alarm.
Typology: Alarm
MC100 activates this anomaly if the digital input configured with the function DIF.0082 –
“production line open” is activated (even for a very small time). Note: this alarm forces the
opening of all generator circuit breakers GCB; this function is directly managed by the
genset controllers after receiving a proper message over the PMCB bus.
Typology: Alarm
This anomaly is used only for parallel to mains operations. MC100 activates it when the circuit
breaker configured as “interface device” (P.3601) does not open in 0.5 seconds from the “loss
of mains”. Set P.3601 to zero do disable this control: ensure some external logic is able to
disconnect generators from mains in case of loss of mains.

Related parameters: P.0384, P.0385, P.0386
This anomaly is activated when the active power measured on the mains is negative
(exported) and is greater (absolute value) than the threshold P.0384 continuously for the time
P.0385. The action related to the protection can be configured by P.0386:
 73 – Warning. The controller activates the warning but keeps the generators in parallel
to the mains,
 75 – Alarm. The controller activates the alarm, opens MGCB (when present), forces
the genset controllers to open their GCB and to stop the engines with the standard
procedure (with the cool down cycle).
 77 – Warning (MCB). If this value is selected, when the protection trips the controller
opens MCB and keeps the gensets running for supply the load in island mode. The
controller will try to close MCB only after the warning has been acknowledged. Note:
using this value, the protection works in OFF/RESET mode also (it opens MCB). In

this way the mains is protected against manual parallel performed on the genset
controllers when MC100 is in OFF/RESET mode.
These anomalies are all identical; they differ only for the related input. The following
description is common for all these anomalies, but refers to parameters related to input
1(P.1461, P.1462 e P.1463). Consider the parameters related to your used input.
Typology: Configurable
Related parameters: P.1461 P.1462 P.1463
To disable: P.1461 <> (DIF.0073, DIF.0074, DIF.0075, DIF.0076, DIF.0077,
DIF.0078)
Parameter P.1461 configures the kind of anomaly. The following codes are available:
 DIF.0073 (“Warning”).
 DIF.0074 (“Unload”).
 DIF.0075 (“Alarm”).
 DIF.0076 (“Alarm transmitted to gensets too”).
 DIF.0077 (“Warning (MCB)”).

 DIF.0078 (“Alarm (MCB)”).
MC100 activates the anomaly when the configured input is activated consecutively for the
configured time (P.1462). The message for the anomaly is the one configured for the input
P.1463.

This function is used for “emergency” plants (MSB or MSB+MSTP). Normally, in case of mains
live, the controller connects the load to the mains. For stand-by application, MCB must be
usually closed in order to connect the loads to the mains. Using this function is possible to
automatically start the gensets and supply the loads in case of MCB failure.
In order to use this function, carry out following configuration:
 MCB status feedback must be connected to a digital input of the controller.
 Set parameter P.3814 to 1.
With such configuration, MCB status is continuously monitored. When MCB is commanded
closed but remains opened for more than the programmed time (mains has to be present if
MCB is supplied by mains – P.3005), the following actions are carried out:
 It tries to close the MCB circuit breaker.
 In case if failure, warning W013 is issued.
 All available engines are started.
 Loads are connected to generators.
Now, the loads won’t be switched automatically on the mains until the operator “acknowledges”
the warning W013. After this operation, the controller will try again to close MCB: if it does not
close, the warning will be issued again and the load will stay switched on gensets.
In MAN mode (or with start inhibitions activated) the function is disabled.
Starting from version 1.31, the controller starts the generators (if P.3814 is set to 1) even when
is activated the generic warning related to a digital input configured with the function DIF.0077
(“warning (MCB”). Even in this case, the controller will try to close MCB (and then will stop the
generators) only when the operator will acknowledge and reset that warning.
It is possible to use some digital inputs, properly configured (see 7.4), to allow changing system
configuration without directly changing programming parameters. In fact, the controller
manages internally four groups of alternative parameters that can be “copied” in the operating
parameters on request (through a dedicated digital input).
Parameters modified by the alternative set are the followings:
 P.1001 - “Generators/mains nominal frequency”.
 P.1101 - “Generators number of phases”.
 P.1102 - “Generators nominal voltage”.
 P.1103 - “Generators VT primary voltage”.
 P.1104 - “Generators VT secondary voltage”.
 P.1201 - “Mains number of phases”.
 P.1202 - “Mains nominal voltage”.
 P.1203 - “Mains VT primary voltage”.
 P.1204 - “Mains VT secondary voltage”.

 P.1302 - “CT primary”.
 P.1304 - “Auxiliary CT primary.
It is possible to change the configuration by means the following input digital functions:
 DIF.0052 – “Select configuration 1”. When the input becomes active, parameters of
alternative configuration set 1 are copied in the working configuration.
Remark: copying an alternative set in working configuration causes the loss of the previous
loaded parameters. The only way to restore them without manual reprogramming is to
configure the same parameters in another alternative set.
This function is useful for multi voltage/frequency systems, allowing a fast configuration
change without direct controller reprogramming.
Note: the parameter change can be carried out only with the controller in OFF/RESET.
Note: MC100 is not able to detect EJP signals from the mains. In order to use this function, an
external detector device should be used. The detector should provide two output signals
consistent with the MC100 EJP functionality.
The EJP function allows starting the engines and warming them before mains faults, so when
it will happen, loads can be immediately changed-over to genset, reducing to the minimum the
time the loads stay unsupplied (or better the gensets can be placed in parallel to the mains a
little time before the mains fault, so load are continuously supplied).
The system uses two signal supplied by the mains supplier:
A. A signal activated well in advance with respect to the mains fault or fare change.
B. A signal activated just before mains fault or fare change.
What is desired is to start the engines in some advance (configurable) in respect to “B” signal;
load however is changed-over only when “B” is activated.
 “A” and “B” signals must stay active until mains comes back (or high fare ends).
 Both signals must be connected with relays with exchanging contacts.
 The time between “A” and “B” signals activation must be known.
To use this function the board has to be configured in the following way:
 Configure one digital input with the function DIF.0042 (”Remote start command”).
Moreover, for this input it has to be configured the desired delay between “A” signal
activation and the engines start (in seconds, in parameter P.1402 or equivalents). If,
by example, we want to warm the engines for five minutes and “A” signal will be
activated 30 minutes before “B”, the P.1402 delay will be 1500 seconds that is 25
minutes (it is possible to set delays up to 6000 seconds that is 100 minutes).
 Configure one digital input with the function DIF.0044 (”Load inhibition command”).

Then connect the N.O. contact of the relay on “A” signal to first configured input and N.C.
contact of “B” signal relay to second input. NOTE: the function DIF.0044 “Load inhibition
command” prevents to connect the loads, even if the gensets have been started automatically
for other reasons. To avoid this problem, use a logic that prevents to activate this input if the
generators are not started by “REMOTE START” function.
When both signals are inactive, the board has not the “remote start” request and so stays at
rest in AUTO mode. The “load inhibition command” contact is ignored.
When “A” signal is activated, both board inputs will be active. The board will not pass
immediately to “REMOTE START” mode, but will do it only after the time configured in P.1402
(or equivalents). So in this phase too the “load inhibition command” is ignored. In this phase,
window S.01 shows the remaining time before cranking.
After the configured time from “A” signal activation, the board passes in “REMOTE START”
mode and proceeds to start the engines. In this phase, the “load inhibition command” is no
more ignored, it is active (connected to the NC contact) and it will prevent the loads switch on
the gensets.
When the “B” signal is activated, the “load inhibition command” input is deactivated, allowing
the load switch on the gensets.
When the function ends, both “A” and “B” signals are deactivated. Therefore, the board comes
back in AUTO mode, and being mains present, it provides to stop the engines.
The board manages internally the following counters:
 Active energy (kWh) of generators, resettable: it counts only the supplied energy, it
does not count in case of power reverse.
 Active energy (kWh) of generators, total: it counts only the supplied energy, it does
not count in case of power reverse.
 Reactive energy (kvarh) of generators, resettable; it counts the absolute value.
 Reactive energy (kvarh) of generators, total: it counts only the supplied energy, it does
not count in case of power reverse.
 Mains Active energy (kWh) resettable, exported.
 Mains Active energy (kWh) total, exported.
 Mains Reactive energy (kvarh) resettable, exported.
 Mains Reactive energy (kvarh) total, exported.
 Mains Active energy (kWh) resettable, imported.
 Mains Active energy (kWh) total, imported.
 Mains Active energy (kWh) resettable, imported.
 Mains Active energy (kWh) total, imported.
 Board absolute supply time (hours).
Some of these counters are displayed on the controller front panel. All are however readable
by means of serial ports (with the Modbus protocol). Some of these counters can be reset by
means of the front panel or the serial ports (on the list they are identified as “resettable”). All
these counters are saved in a non-volatile memory and so they maintain their value also
removing supply from the board. Since non-volatile memories “consume” themselves writing
in them, it is necessary to reduce at the minimum the number of writings. For this reason, a
counter is not immediately saved as its value changes, and it is then important to know when

values are saved and how to be sure that they are saved before removing supply from the
board.
Counters are saved (all together and in the same time) in the following conditions:
 Each time the operating mode is switched to OFF/RESET.
 For each board supply hour.
Furthermore, counters are saved when they are reset (singularly or globally) from serial ports.
Beware that some counters have a decimal part (example the minutes-counters associated to
hours-counters), which is saved in non-volatile memory too. Removing supply to the board in
an uncontrolled way, there is the risk to loose just this decimal part. It is however sufficient
switch the operating mode to OFF/RESET to force the board to save data, before removing
the supply.
The board is provided with a hardware clock. It is displayed in detail in page S.06. Time and
date are programmable through the menu 4.0.0 of the program function or trough the serial
ports.
 Clock is used for many functions: History logs recordings (see 8).
 Weekly planning of the start of the engine for TEST (see 10.2).
 Weekly planning of time intervals in which the gensets must not automatically be
started (see 10.2).
 Weekly planning of time intervals in which the gensets intervention is forced (see
10.2).
The board is provided with a thermometer used to measure the internal temperature. The
measure is shown on S.06 page of the multifunction display. It is used for many functions:
 It is used for automatic compensation of the multifunction display contrast on changes
of the ambient temperature. Without this regulation, if you set the contrast on summer,
the reading of the display in winter should be not possible or much difficult.
 The display becomes slower in showing information at very low temperatures. By
using the thermometer, when the temperature falls under a very low threshold, the
board switches on the backlight lamp of the display, and this contributes to warm it up
and to improve its performances.
 The electronic components inside the board have an extended working temperature
range. Despite this, it is possible in critical ambient conditions that temperature goes
out of this range. The board uses the thermometer to activate a warning if the ambient
temperature becomes greater than a configurable threshold. This is useful for alerting
the operator, but is also possible to use one board configurable output for activate an
external cooling system (by using the bit-mapping function you can configure one
output to follow the state of the high internal temperature warning).
 For diagnostic purpose, the controller stores in its history logs the highest and lowest
temperature measured. With this function, it is possible to examine in a second time
the board working conditions, checking if it is necessary to install external
warming/cooling systems, in order to improve the operating conditions.
It is possible to configure the outputs from 5 to 14 with the function DOF.0061 (”Device fault”).
The output is always activated: it can be not active only due to an internal fault of the controller.
It can be use to signal an external fault.

MC100 has two independent serial ports. Both support the Modbus protocol. For the
configuration of the ports, use the following parameters:
Function Parameter for Parameter for
serial port 1 serial port 2
Modbus address P.4202 P.4212
Baud Rate P.4203 P.4213
Settings (n° of bit, parity, stopbit) P.4204 P.4214
Modbus registers order P.4205 P.4215
The parameters P.4205 and P.4215 determine how the 32 information are divided in the 16bit
registers considered by Modbus:
 0-LSWf: when transferring 32bit information, the Modbus register with the lowest index
will include the information low 16bit.
 1-MSWf: when transferring 32bit information, the Modbus register with the lowest
index will include the information high 16bit.
The serial port 1 (JA) can be connected to a modem. In this case, set the parameter P.4201
to 1.

This document is owned by SICES s.r.l..
All rights reserved. SICES s.r.l. reserves the right to modify this document without prior notice.
SICES has made any effort to ensure that the information herein provide are correct; in any case
SICES does not assume any liability for the use these information.
The disclosure by any means of this document to third parties is not allowed.

MC100 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

MC100 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MC100 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Filename: EAAM034510EN.

01 01/07/2010 14-15, 18, 39, 52, 87 – 90

02 30/10/2010 111 Valid from software 1.01 of MC100.

05 08/01/2015 167 Complete revision of the manual. Update to version 1.25 of

06 28/10/2015 162 Update to version 1.28 of controller

07 11/12/2015 154 Update to version 1.31 of controller

09 24/01/2017 155 Update to version 1.37 of controller

10 11/04/2017 156 Update to version 1.39 of controller

ii MC100 Technical Manual

MC100 Technical Manual iii

iv MC100 Technical Manual

MC100 Technical Manual v

vi MC100 Technical Manual

MC100 Technical Manual vii

viii MC100 Technical Manual

MC100 Technical Manual ix

x MC100 Technical Manual

MC100 Technical Manual xi

[2] SICES EAAM0371xxIT - MC100 parameter tables.

[3] SICES EAAM0199xx - DST4602/GC500 parallel functions manual.

[5] SICES EAAS0361xxEN - MC100 Modbus protocol.

MC100 Technical Manual 1

The device uses a high number of configurable parameters, so it is impossible to

o MC100 removes the intervention requests for the gensets.

2 MC100 Technical Manual

o MC100 removes the intervention requests for the gensets.

o MC100 activates an interruption to the gensets controllers (”master block”)

MC100 Technical Manual 3

MPM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

MPtM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

MPtM + MSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

MSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

MSB + MSTP See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

SPM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

SPtM See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

SPtM + SSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

SSB See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

SSB + SSTP See the description of the type of plant in 10.12.

The following hardware options are available:

 E620211110100: three-phase mains input (JF) at 100 Vac.

 E620211110200: three-phase gensets input (JE) at 100 Vac.

4 MC100 Technical Manual

MC100 Technical Manual 5

6 MC100 Technical Manual

MC100 Technical Manual 7

Protection ground must be permanently connected where required.

8 MC100 Technical Manual

The device automatically acknowledge the plant operation at

Maximum current absorption in operating

L-L voltages measurement

Measurement of three currents with internal shunt with back

Maximum mains/genset voltage allowed: Inputs at 400Vac nominal:

Versions with inputs at 100Vac nominal:

MC100 Technical Manual 9

Versions with inputs100 Vac:

17.5 Vac L1-L2 @ 50 Hz mains

Versions with standard inputs400 Vac: